New Perspectives on HTML5 CSS3 JavaScript 6th Edition Carey Test Bank

New Perspectives on HTML5 CSS3 JavaScript 6th Edition Carey Test Bank

richard@qwconsultancy.com

1|Pa ge

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 True / False 1. A network that covers a wider area, such as several buildings or cities, is called a wide area network or WAN. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 2. Each document on the World Wide Web is referred to as a web page and is stored on a list server. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Understand REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 3. Web pages are image files written in Extended Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML). a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 4. The body element is where the information about the document is provided to the browsers. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 10 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.08 - Mark content with text-level elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML document KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 5. Element attributes provide additional information to the browser about the purpose of the element or how the element should be handled by the browser. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 11 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.08 - Mark content with text-level elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 6. A Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file is a text file composed only of text characters. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 12 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.08 - Mark content with text-level elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 7. A comment in a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file appears in the browser window when a page is displayed. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 18 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Comments to your Document KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 8. The address element in HTML 5 contains the entire content of a document. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 24 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.06 - Mark page structures with sectioning elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:39 AM 4/3/2017 9:39 AM

9. Sectioning elements are placed within grouping elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 27 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.07 - Organize page content with grouping element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 10. The text-level element b marks content that acts as a hypertext link. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 29 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.08 - Mark content with text-level elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 11. A text-level element does not start out on a new line but flows below the rest of the characters in grouping element. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

False 1 Moderate

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 REFERENCES: HTML 29 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.08 - Mark content with text-level elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 12. Style sheets are written in the Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) language. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 32 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Linking an HTML Document to a Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 13. Sectioning elements are also known as interactive elements because they allow interaction between a user and an embedded object. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 36 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.09 - Insert inline images NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Inline Images KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 14. Images are also known as inline images because they are placed, like text-level elements, in line with surrounding content. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 37 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.09 - Insert inline images NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Inline Images KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 15. The img element is inserted using the empty element tag because it does not enclose any page content, but instead links to an external image file. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 38 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.09 - Insert inline images NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Inline Images KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 16. Browsers will display items from an ordered list alongside a marker such as a bullet point. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 49 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 17. The description list is grouped by the ol element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 51 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 18. Inline images can be turned into links by enclosing the image within opening and closing <b> tags. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 59 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Hypertext Links KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 19. Pages on web use the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) protocol and therefore the URL for many web pages start with the http scheme. a. True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 64 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Linking to the Internet and Other Resources KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 20. The set of rules that define how information is passed between two devices are called protocols. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 64 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Linking to Internet and Other Sources KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM Modified True / False 21. In order for computers to share resources efficiently, they can be linked together in a structure called network.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 4/3/2017 9:39 AM

22. Hypertext organizes data through a series of sites users can activate to jump from one piece of information to another.

ANSWER: False - links POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 23. A markup language is a language that describes the content and structure of a document by identifying different elements in a document ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 24. Nested elements are elements that are either nontextual or contain directives to a browser about how a page should be treated.

ANSWER: False - Empty elements POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 9 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Exploring an HTML Document Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 4/3/2017 9:39 AM

25. A one-sided tag contains an opening tag that tells the browser to turn a feature on and apply it to the content that follows, and a closing tag that turns off the feature.

ANSWER: False - Two-sided POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 9 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 26. If no doctype is provided in a Hypertext Markup language (HTML) file, browsers render the document in standard mode based on practices followed in the 1990s.

ANSWER: False - quirks mode POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 9 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 27. When nesting one element inside of another, the entire code of the inner element must be contained within the outer element, including opening and closing tags.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 10 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 28. The top element in the hierarchy is the html element, which contains all of the other elements within a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 10 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 29. Empty space includes blank spaces, tabs, and line breaks found within the file.

ANSWER: False - White space POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 12 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 30. The structural element, aside, is content placed at the bottom of the page.

ANSWER: False - footer POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 24 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.06 - Mark page structures with sectioning elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 31. The grouping element, ul, contains the definition associated with a term from a description list.

ANSWER: False - dd POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 27 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 32. HTML text-element wbr marks text that is treated as a variable in a mathematical expression.

ANSWER: False - var POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 29 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.08 - Mark content with text-level elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 33. The strong element is a text-level element that marks a text of great importance.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 30 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.08 - Mark content with text-level elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 34. Section breaks must be placed within grouping elements such as paragraphs or headings.

ANSWER: False - Line breaks POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 38 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.09 - Insert inline images NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Inline Images KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 35. Nested lists are used for items that follow some defined sequential order.

ANSWER: False - Ordered lists POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 48 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM Multiple Choice 36. A network confined to a small geographic area is referred to as a _____. a. LAN (local area network) b. WAN (wide area network) c. extranet d. hypernet ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 37. If a network covers several buildings or cities, it is called _____. a. intranet b. WAN (wide area network) c. LAN (local area network) d. hypernet ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 38. The largest wide area network (WAN) in existence is the _____. a. intranet b. extranet c. Internet d. hypernet ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Exploring the World Wide Web Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 4/3/2017 9:39 AM

39. A host that provides storage space for saving and retrieving records is called a _____. a. spool server b. cast server c. proxy server d. file server ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 40. The totality of interconnected hypertext documents became known as the _____. a. World Wide Web b. client-server network c. intranet d. hypernet ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 41. The World Wide Web Consortium enforced a stricter set of standards in a different version of Hypertext Markup Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 Language (HTML) called _____. a. Hypertext markup Language (HTML) 4.01 b. Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) c. Extensible Markup Language (XML) d. Dynamic Hypertext Markup Language (DHTML) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 42. Documents on the web stored on web servers are known as web _____. a. pages b. sites c. links d. indices ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 43. Web pages are accessed through a software program called a _____. a. web crawler b. web browser c. web server d. web app drawer ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 44. A _____ is a software program that retrieves a document from a web server and renders it locally in a form that is readable on a client device. a. web browser b. web app c. web server d. web crawler ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 45. Web pages are text files written in a language called _____. a. Standard Text Markup Language (STML) b. Structured Query language (SQL) c. C++ d. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 46. A _____ language is a language used to describe the content and structure of documents. a. markup b. parsing c. validation d. lexical ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 47. Which version of Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) is not backward compatible with HTML? a. 1.0 b. 1.1 c. 2.0 d. 5.0 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 48. A group of web designers and programmers called the _____ settled on a set of standards for all browser manufacturers to follow. a. World Wide Web Consortium b. Internet Task Force c. Web Server Consortium d. Client/server Development Group ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 49. Hypertext Markup language (HTML) version _____ added support for style sheets to give web designers greater control over page layout and appearance. a. 3.2 b. 2.0 c. 3.0 d. 4.01 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 6 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 50. Hypertext Markup language (HTML) version _____ added interactive elements, including web forms. a. 3.0 b. 2.0 c. 5.0 d. 4.01 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 6 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 51. Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) version _____ is a reformulation of HTML 4.01 in the Extensible Markup language (XML) language in order to provide enforceable standards for HTML content and to allow HTML to interact with other XML languages. a. 1.0 b. 1.1 c. 2.0 d. 5.0 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 6 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 52. Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) version _____ is an update to HTML 4.01 that provides support for a variety of new features including semantic page elements, column layout, form validation, offline storage, and enhanced multimedia. a. 1.0 b. 1.1 c. 2.0 d. 5.0 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 REFERENCES: HTML 6 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 53. _____ is a software package providing comprehensive coverage of all phases of the development process from writing Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) code to creating scripts for programs running on web servers. a. World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) b. Integrated Development Environment (IDE) c. Java Development Runtime Kit (JDRK) d. Extensible Markup Language (XML) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 7 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Tools for Working with HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 54. _____ are programs that test code to ensure that it contains no syntax errors. a. Endorsers b. Quantifiers c. Validators d. Testers ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 7 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Tools for Working with HTML Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 4/3/2017 9:39 AM

55. Which of the following is a popular integrated development environment for web development? a. Adobe Dreamweaver b. Adobe Reader c. Windows Notepad d. Microsoft Word ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 7 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Tools for Working with HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 56. The first line in a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file is the _____, which is a processing instruction indicating the markup language used in a document. a. title b. header c. doctype d. list ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 8 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 57. When a doctype is present, browsers will render the page in _____ mode, employing the most current specifications of Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 Hypertext markup Language (HTML). a. quirks b. standards c. supervisor d. protected ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 9 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 58. The fundamental building block in every Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) document is the _____ tag, which marks a component in the document. a. head b. paragraph c. element d. anchor ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 9 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 59. Identify the elements that are either nontextual or contain directives to a browser about how a page should be treated. a. Nested elements b. Two-sided elements c. Three-sided elements d. Empty elements ANSWER: d Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 9 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 60. A(n) ______ includes the blank spaces, tabs, and line breaks found within the file. a. blank-space character b. empty-space character c. white-space character d. black-space character ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 12 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 61. The exact appearance of each page is described in a separate document known as a ______. a. link sheet b. style sheet c. tag sheet d. look sheet ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 13 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Exploring an HTML Document 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 4/3/2017 9:39 AM

62. In a two-sided tag, a(n) _____ tag indicates the content's end. a. end b. closing c. empty d. exit ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 14 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 63. The _____ element is part of the document head because it’s not actually displayed as part of the web page, but rather appears externally within the browser tab. a. script b. title c. style d. meta ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 15 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.05 - Define a page title NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Document Head KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 64. The _____ element, a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) metadata element, contains a collection of metadata Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 elements that describe the document or provide instructions to the browser. a. head b. html c. body d. list ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 15 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.04 - Insert metadata into a document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Document Head KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 65. Identify an attribute of the meta element provides the value associated with the http-equiv or name attributes. a. charset=”encoding”opening b. content=”text” c. name=”text” d. http-equiv=”content-type|default-style|refresh” ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 16 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.04 - Insert metadata into a document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Document Head KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 66. The most common character encoding in use is _____. a. UTF-8 b. ASCII c. Latin-1 d. ISO 8859-1 ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 17 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Document Head KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 67. To add notes or comments, insert a comment tag using the syntax _____. a. <---comment> b. <!--comment--> c. </--comment> d. <!--comment!--> ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 18 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Comments to your Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 68. To add the comment, Welcome John Smith, the syntax would be _____. a. <---Welcome John Smith> b. <!--”Welcome John Smith !--> c. <!--Welcome John Smith --> d. < !/--- Welcome John Smith-->?

ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 18 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Adding Comments to your Document Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 4/3/2017 9:39 AM

69. A sectioning element that marks content related to a main article is _____. a. <article> b. <footer> c. <nav> d. <aside> ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 24 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.06 - Mark page structures with sectioning elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 70. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) sectioning elements are also known as _____ because the tag name describes the purpose of the element and the type of content it contains. a. grouping elements b. meta elements c. semantic elements d. text-level elements ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 24 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.06 - Mark page structures with sectioning elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 71. Identify a grouping element that marks a thematic break such as a scene change or transition to a new topic. a. hr b. br c. pre d. main ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 27 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.07 - Organize page content with grouping element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 72. Which of the following Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) grouping elements contains a single item from an ordered or unordered list? a. nav b. pre c. li d. div ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 27 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.07 - Organize page content with grouping element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 73. _____ contains a generic grouping of elements within a document. a. <dir> b. <div> c. <dd> d. <span> ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 27 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 74. Identify a grouping element containing content that is derived from another source, often with a citation and often indented on a page. a. blockquote b. pre c. figcaption d. main ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 27 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.07 - Organize page content with grouping element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 75. The _____ grouping element contains a single term from a description list. a. <dt> b. <dd> c. <ds> d. <li> ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 27 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.06 - Mark page structures with sectioning elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 76. Identify the grouping element which contains an illustration, photo, diagram, or similar object that is cross-referenced elsewhere in a document. a. figure b. character c. image d. picture ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 27 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.07 - Organize page content with grouping element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 77. Identify a text-level element that indicates a span of text that expresses an alternative voice or mood. a. i b. span c. kbd d. wbr ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 29 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.08 - Mark content with text-level elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:39 AM

78.

The _____ grouping element contains content that is quoted from another source, often with a citation and often indented on a page. a. hgroup b. blockquote c. pre d. list ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Difficulty: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 27 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Block Quotes and Other Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 79. Identify a text-level element used to mark generic run of text within the document. a. span b. div c. cite d. mark ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 29 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.08 - Mark content with text-level elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 80. ______, a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) text-level element, marks text that represents user input, typically from a computer keyboard or a voice command. a. samp Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 b. kbd c. wbr d. dfn ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 29 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.08 - Mark content with text-level elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:39 AM 81. If the encoding value is known, one can insert the corresponding character directly into a web page using the character encoding reference _____. a. &#code; b. &char; c. &nbsp; d. &copy; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 33 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Character Sets and Special Characters KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 82. The character set used for the English alphabet is the _____. a. Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code (EBCDIC) b. Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) c. American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) d. Unicode Binary Format (UBF) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 33 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Character Sets and Special Characters KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 83. Character entity references are inserted using the syntax _____. a. <char> b. charset=”encoding” c. &char; d. “charset=utf-8” ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 34 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Character Sets and Special Characters KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 84. Identify the character entity reference that can be used to force Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) to display an extra white space. a. &nbsp; b. <double space> c. <p = “ “ “ “> d. <br /> ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Remember REFERENCES: HTML 34 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Working with Character Sets and Special Characters Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

85. _____ is a short memorable name used in place of encoding reference number. a. Character entity reference b. Character encoding c. Numeric character reference d. Special character reference ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 34 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Character Sets and Special Characters KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 86. Identify a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) embedded element that contains programming scripts used to construct bitmap images and graphics. a. canvas b. iframe c. object d. embed ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 36 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.09 - Insert inline images NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Inline Images KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 87. Early versions of HTML supported presentational _____ and presentational attributes designed to describe how each element should be rendered by web browsers. a. units b. levels c. elements d. characteristics ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 36 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Character Sets and Special Characters KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 88. _____ are placed within grouping elements, such as paragraphs or headings, to force page content to start on a new line wi thin the group. a. Space breaks b. Block breaks c. Line breaks d. List breaks ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 38 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.09 - Insert inline images NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Inline Images KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 89. An oft-used empty element is _____ element, which marks a major topic change within a section. a. canvas b. horizontal rule c. semantic page Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 d. two-sided ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 39 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.09 - Insert inline images NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Inline Images KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 90. A(n) _____ list is used to display information in sequential order. a. ordered b. tasks c. reference d. bulleted ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 48 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 91. The structure for an unordered list is similar to that used with ordered lists except that the list items are grouped within the _____ element. a. li b. ol c. ul d. p ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 48 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 92. Since the li element is itself a grouping element, it can be used to group other lists, which in turn creates a series of _____. a. ordered lists b. unordered lists c. nested lists d. navigation lists ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 50 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 93. _____ is used to provide visual clues that the text is hypertext links rather than normal text. a. Rollover effect b. Absolute path c. Pullover effect d. White-space blank ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 59 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Hypertext Links Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

94. Identify the root folder in the absolute path /folder1/folder2/folder3/file. a. file b. folder2 c. folder3 d. folder1 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 61 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Specifying the Folder Path KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Undertstand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 95. Which of the following elements can be added to a document head to define a different starting point for relative paths? a. <a href=”file#id” /> b. <base href=”url” /> c. <base id=”id”> d. <img src=”file” /> ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 62 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Specifying the Folder Path KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 96.

In order to enable users to jump to a specific location within a document, identify the attribute that should be added to an e Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 lement tag to recognize that location. a. div b. span c. a=”ref” d. id=”text” ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 63 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Linking to a Location within a Document KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Moderate DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 97. Identify a general structure shared by all Uniform Resource Locators (URLs). a. scheme:location b. ../../index.html c. &nbsp; d. <a href=”url” /> ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 64 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.14 - Link to e-mail addresses and telephone numbers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Linking to the Internet and Other Resources KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 98. Which of the following should be used for secure connection over the web? a. https b. .net c. www d. http ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 65 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Linking to the Internet and Other Resources KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 99. An e-mail address can be turned into a hypertext link using the URL _____. a. <mail="address"> b. mailto:address c. &mail; d. mail:<address="(_blank|_self|_top)"> ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 65 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.14 - Link to e-mail addresses and telephone numbers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Linking to the Internet and Other Resources KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 100. The Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for a phone link is _____. a. tel:phone b. call:<number> c. phone:”number” d. <href=”url”> ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

a 1 Easy HTML 67 Multiple Choice False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.14 - Link to e-mail addresses and telephone numbers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Linking to the Internet and Other Resources KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 101. Identify an attribute of the “an” element that indicates the media type of z linked document. a. rel=”type” b. hreflang=”lang” c. type=”mime-type” d. href=”url” ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 68 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Hypertext Attributes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 102. In the context of hypertext attribute, identify a target name that opens the page in the current window or tab. a. _blank b. _parent c. _self d. _top ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 69 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Hypertext Attributes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

103. To force a document to appear in a new window or tab, identify an attribute that should be added to <a> tag. a. href b. target c. start d. role ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 69 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Hypertext Attributes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 1-1 Lucy wants to develop a web page to display her profile. She wants to just start with a basic page that lists her accomplishments, her work history, and the different computer courses she has taken. She would like each section to be clearly identified.

104. Where will Lucy's information page be stored once she has created it? a. on a web page b. on a network driver c. on a web server d. on the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Carrey Chapter 01 Case 1-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Exploring the World Wide Web Bloom’s: Apply 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

105. What would be the best file name for Lucy's page according to Internet conventions? a. Lucy's Info b. lucysinfo c. LucysInfo d. Lucys Info ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 14 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Carrey Chapter 01 Case 1-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.05 - Define a page title NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 106. Lucy's page will require at least ____ headings for what she wants to display. a. 3 b. 1 c. 2 d. 6 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 24 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Carrey Chapter 01 Case 1-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.07 - Organize page content with grouping element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Writing the Page Body KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM

107. Which type of list would work best for listing Lucy's accomplishments? a. legends list b. header list c. definition list d. unordered list ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 49 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Carrey Chapter 01 Case 1-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 1-2 Ted is asked to create a page containing his family photos for a family reunion website. He will has about 20 pictures to post, with a caption that he wants to display before each one. Each picture is a group photo of a particular family.

108. What character entity reference could Ted use to add a notice at the bottom of the page to remind viewers that the photos are copyrighted? a. &copy; b. <copy/> c. copy: d. &#copy ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 34 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Carrey Chapter 01 Case 1-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Working with Character Sets and Special Characters Bloom’s: Apply 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

109. Which tag will Ted need to use to display the pictures? a. <p> b. <body pic src> c. <hr> d. <img src> ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 36 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Carrey Chapter 01 Case 1-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.09 - Insert inline images NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Inline Images KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 110. What attribute could he add to make sure they are centered? a. break b. align c. arrange d. pre ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 36 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Carrey Chapter 01 Case 1-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Character Sets and Special Characters KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 1-3 Lew Russell, owner of Lew’s Surfboards, would like to develop a page that would show a list of surfboard types along with their descriptions.

111. Which tag should Lew use to create a list to display his surfboard types along with a narrative for each type? a. Ordered list b. Description list c. Unordered list d. Legends list ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 51 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Carrey Chapter 01 Case 1-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 112. If Lew wanted to accent the division between the surfboard types, which of the following tags should he use? a. horizontal line b. whitespace c. one-sided align d. two-sided align ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 39 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Carrey Chapter 01 Case 1-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.09 - Insert inline images NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Inline Images Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Apply 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

Completion 113. A host that provides information or a service to other devices on the network is known as a _________.

ANSWER: server POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 114. A computer or other device that receives a service is called a _________.

ANSWER: client POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 115. _________ is a method of organization in which data sources are interconnected through a series of links that users activat e to jump from one data source to another.

ANSWER: Hypertext POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 4 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Introducing HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 116. A web page is stored on a web _________.

ANSWER: server POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 117. To view a web page, the client runs a web _________.

ANSWER: browser POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 118. Each element is marked within the HTML file by one or more _________.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 49

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 ANSWER:

tags element tags

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 9 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 119. Empty elements are entered using _________ element tags.

ANSWER: one-sided POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 9 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 120. As some attributes do not require a value, HTML supports _________ in which no value is shown in the document.

ANSWER: attribute minimization POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 11 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring an HTML Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 50

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM

121.

The document head contains _________, which is content that describes the document or provides information about how the document should be processed by the browser.

ANSWER: metadata POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 15 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.04 - Insert metadata into a document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Creating the Document Head KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 122. _________ is the process by which the computer converts text into a sequence of bytes when it stores the text and then co nverts those bytes back into characters when the text is read.

ANSWER: Character encoding POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 17 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Creating the Document Head KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 123. A more extended character set, called the _________ or ISO 88591 character set, supports 255 characters and can be used by most languages.

ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

Latin-1 1 Moderate HTML 33

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 51

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Character Sets and Special Characters KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 124. _________, the most extended character set, supports up to 65,536 symbols and can be used with any of the world’s l anguages.

ANSWER: Unicode POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 33 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Character Sets and Special Characters KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 125. Most web pages include _________ content, which is content imported from another resource, often nontextual, such as graphic images, video clips, or interactive games.

ANSWER:

embedded

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 36 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.09 - Insert inline images NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Inline Images KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 52

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 126. _________ lists are used for listing items without any sequential order.

ANSWER: Unordered POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 49 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 127. A(n) _________ list is a list of terms and matching descriptions.

ANSWER: description POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 51 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 128. A(n) _________ list is an unordered list of hypertext links placed within the nav element.

ANSWER: navigation POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 55 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.12 - Create a navigation list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 53

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

129. _________ is a standard address format used to link to a variety of resources including documents, email addresses, and telephone numbers.

ANSWER:

Uniform resource locator (URL)

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 57 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Hypertext Links KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 130. A(n) _________ is a path that starts from the root folder and processes down the entire folder structure.

ANSWER: absolute path POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 61 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Specifying the Folder Path KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 131. To define a different starting point for relative paths, a(n) _________ element is added to the document head.

ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

base 1 Easy HTML 64 Completion

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 54

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Specifying the Folder Path KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 132. A(n) _________ is a set of rules defining how information is passed between two devices.

ANSWER: protocol POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 64 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.13 - Link to files within a website with hypertext links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Linking to the Internet and Other Resources KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Matching Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. Web server b. Web browser c. tag d. attribute e. style sheet f. empty g. white space h. XHTML i. ordered list j. unordered list k. test-level element l. presentational attribute DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 5 HTML 6 HTML 9 HTML 11 HTML 12 HTML 29 HTML 32 HTML 36 HTML 48 HTML 49 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 55

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.01 - Exploring the history of web 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document 01.03 - Insert HTML elements and attributes 01.07 - Organize page content with grouping element 01.10 - Insert symbols based on character codes 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the World Wide Web Exploring an HTML Document Writing the Page Body Linking an HTML Document to a Style Sheet Working with Character Sets and Special Characters Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 133. where web pages are stored ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 134. A software program that retrieves web pages and displays them ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 135. Marks each element in a document ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 136. Used to control the behavior/appearance of an element in a page ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 137. Specifies the appearance of different HTML elements ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 138. One-sided tage are also known as this type of tag ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 139. Includes the blank space, tabs, and line breaks found within a file ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 56

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 140. Designed to overcome some of the problems of completing HTML standards ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 141. Used to display information in a sequential order ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 142. Used to present list items, but not in a particular order ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 143. Marks content within grouping element ANSWER: k POINTS: 1 144. Used to describe deprecated parts of a tag, such as align ANSWER: l POINTS: 1 Essay 145.

Briefly describe three guidelines for writing good HTML code that potential web page authors should be familiar with.

ANSWER: Become well versed in the history of HTML and various versions of HTML and XHTML. Unlike other languages, HTML history impacts how one writes the html code.

Become familiar with what different browsers can and cannot do.

Test the code. If the code has to support several types of browsers and several types of devices, get them and use them to view the documents. Do not assume that if the page works in one browser it will work in an older version of that same browser. In addition, a given browser version might even perform differently under different operating systems.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 15 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.04 - Insert metadata into a document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Creating the Document Head KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 146.

What is the role of comments in an HTML document? Describe the correct syntax to use to add a comment to an HTML d Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 57

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 ocument.

ANSWER:

As a web page is created, the developer might want to add notes or comments about the code.

These comments might include the name of the document’s author and the date the document was created. Such notes are not intended to be displayed by the browser, but are instead used to help explain the code developer and others. To add notes or comments, insert a comment tag with the syntax <!-- comment --> where comment is the text of the comment or note.

Because they are ignored by the browser, comments can be added anywhere within the HTML document.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 18 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.02 - Create the structure of an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Adding Comments to your Document KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 147. What are the instructions for creating lists?

ANSWER:

Type <ol> to start an ordered list, <ul> to start an unordered list, or <dl> to start a description list. For each item in an ordered or unordered list, type <li> followed by the text for the list item, followed by </li> at the end of the list item. For each item in a description list, type <dt> before the term, followed by </dt> at the end of the term, and <dd> before the description, followed by </dd> at the end of the description. To turn off the list, type </ol> for an ordered list, </ul> for an unordered list, and </dl> for a definition list.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Challenging HTML 48 HTML 49 HTML 50 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 01.11 - Mark content using lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Working with Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Evaluate Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 58

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 01: Getting Started with HTML5 DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 59

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS True / False 1. The most common way of accepting user input is through a web form. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 86 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.01 - Explore the history of CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 2. User-defined styles can be superseded by external styles, which are the styles that a website author creates and places within a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) file and links to the page. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 87 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.03 - Explore style precedence and inheritance NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 3. The first style sheet interpreted by a browser is the one built into the browser itself. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 87 QUESTION TYPE: True / False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4. One advantage of user-defined style sheets is that they make the web more accessible to visually impaired users who may require larger fonts or the absence of clashing color schemes. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 87 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 5. User-defined styles are defined by users based on the settings they make while configuring a browser. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 87 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 6. Embedded style sheets are created by web page authors and consist of styles that are inserted directly within the body element of a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) document.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 87 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 7. Embedded styles apply to the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) documents in which they are created and are accessible to other documents in the website. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 87 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 8. In every version of Cascading Style Sheets (CSS), one can apply a style rule containing a list of style properties to an element or a group of elements known as a selector. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 90 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Exploring Style Rules Bloom's: Understand 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

9. In addition to the W3C-supported style properties, most browsers supply their own extended library of style properties, known as browser extensions. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 90 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.03 - Explore style precedence and inheritance NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 10. Browser extensions are identified through the use of a vendor prefix, which indicates the browser vendor that created and supports the property. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 90 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.03 - Explore style precedence and inheritance NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 11. A color value is an alphabetic expression that represents the intensity of the primary colors. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 12. Saturation measures the intensity of the chosen color and ranges from 0% (no color) up to 100% (full color). a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 13. Hue values range from 0˚ to 360˚, where 0˚ matches the location of blue on the color wheel, 120˚ matches red, and 240˚ matches green. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

14. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) allow RGB values to be entered as hexadecimal numbers. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 15. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) 3 introduced opacity to the CSS color models where opacity defines how transparent the color appears. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 100 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 16. A generic font describes the general appearance of a typeface and relies on a specific font definition. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS REFERENCES: HTML 115 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 17. Absolute units are units that are fixed in size regardless of the output device and are usually used only with printed media. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 121 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 18. The subscript and superscript styles lower or raise text vertically, as well as resize it. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 128 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Font Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS 19. In the context of formatting lists, by default, unordered lists are displayed with numerals while ordered lists are displayed with a solid disc. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 134 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.09 - Define list styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Formatting Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 20. The content of a blockquote element is usually placed in quotation marks. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 154 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.12 - Insert page content with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Inserting Quotation Marks KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Modified True / False 21. Writing a style rule on a single line saves space, but entering each style property on a separate line often makes a code easier to read and edit.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 90 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 22. Embedded styles are directly applied to specific elements using the style attribute.

ANSWER: False - Inline styles POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 92 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 23. An additional factor in applying a style sheet is that properties are passed from a parent element to its children in a process known as style inheritance.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 93 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 24. To import a style sheet, the command =import url(url); must be added to the style sheet file, where url is the URL of an external style sheet file.

ANSWER: False - @import url(url); POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 96 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 25. RGB triplets can describe 2563 (16.7 million) possible colors, which is a greater number of colors than the human eye can distinguish.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 98 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 26. A decimal is a number expressed in the base 16 numbering system rather than in the commonly used base 10 system.

ANSWER: False - hexadecimal POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 27. Hue measures the brightness of a color and ranges from 0% (black) up to 100% (white).

ANSWER: False - Lightness POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 28. A parent element is an element that contains one or more elements, which are called its child elements.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 108 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 29. A generic font is a font that is identified by name, such as Times New Roman or Helvetica.

ANSWER: False - specific font POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 115 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.08 - Use a web font NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 30. To access and load a web font, the @font-face rule should be added to a style sheet.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 118 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.08 - Use a web font NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 31. One approach to retain the consistency of web page text is to use absolute units, which are expressed relative to the size of other objects within the web page.

ANSWER: False - relative units POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 121 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 32. Relative units define a font size using one of five standard units of measurement.

ANSWER: False - Absolute units POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 121 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 33. A pixel is a relative unit because the actual rendered size depends on the density of the output device.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 122 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 34. Leading measures the amount of space between characters, while tracking refers to the amount of space between words.

ANSWER: False - Kerning POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 125 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Controlling Spacing and Indentation KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 35. Structural pseudo-elements are used to classify items based on their locations within the hierarchy of page elements.

ANSWER: False - pseudo-classes POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 145 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.11 - Use pseudo-classes and pseudo-elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Use pseudo-classes and pseudo elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Multiple Choice 36. Unlike an external style sheet, a(n) _____ style sheet is applied only to the web page in which it is placed. a. linked b. internal Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS c. embedded d. integrated ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 87 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 37. Inline styles are styles applied directly to specific elements using the style attribute <element style=“property: value”> content </element> where element is the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element and _____ define the styles that are applied directly to that element. a. property: value b. element c. element style d. style ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 92 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 38. If two style rules have equal specificity, and thus equal importance, then the one that is defined _____ in the style sheet is the one used. a. last b. first c. second d. third ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 92 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.03 - Explore style precedence and inheritance NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 39. An additional factor in how an element is rendered is that properties are passed from a parent element to its children in a process known as _____. a. style portioning b. style indexing c. style inheritance d. style link ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 93 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 40. Many web browsers include _____ tools to make it easier for designers to locate the source of a style that has been applied to a specific page element. a. designer b. planner c. developer d. creator ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 91 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 41. Identify the correct syntax for adding comments in style sheets. a. <!--comment--> b. /..comment c. //comment// d. /*comment*/ ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 95 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 42. Which of the following rules defines character encoding in every Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) document? a. @charset=“encoding” b. @charset “encoding”; c. &char=“encoding”; d. &char “encoding”; ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 96 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS 43. The _____ statement must always come before any other style rules in a style sheet. a. @import b. @embed c. !import d. !embed ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 96 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 44. The Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) @rule that imports an external style sheet file located at ur1 is _____. a. @import url(url); b. @import “url”; c. @import prefix url d. @import media { url } ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 96 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 45. The @import rule has the same impact as adding multiple _____ elements to a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file. a. connection Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS b. link c. contact d. integrated ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 97 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 46. Adding all the three primary colors—red, green, and blue—at maximum intensity produces the color _____, while adding any two of the three primary colors at maximum intensity produces the trio of complementary colors—yellow, magenta, and cyan. a. white b. blue c. lime d. black ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 98 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Analyze DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 47. Yellow has the RGB triplet _____. a. (0, 0, 0) b. (255, 255, 0) c. (0, 255, 255) d. (255, 0, 255) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Analyze DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 48. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) allow RGB values to be entered as _____. a. binaries b. hexadecimals c. WYSIWYG values d. RBG values ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 49. In the hexadecimal numbering system, the number 16 is expressed as _____. a. 1F b. F c. 10 d. 1 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Working with Color in CSS Bloom's: Evaluate 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

50. In the hexadecimal numbering system, the number 21 is expressed as _____. a. 1F b. F c. 15 d. F1 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Evaluate DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 51. _____ is the tint of a color and is usually represented by a direction on a color wheel. a. Hue b. Saturation c. Lightness d. Darkness ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 52. _____ measures the intensity of the chosen color and ranges from 0% (no color) up to 100% (full color). a. Hue Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS b. Saturation c. Lightness d. Darkness ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 53. Color values using the HSL model are described in Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) 3 using _____. a. #redgreenblue b. rgb(number) c. hsl (hue, saturation, lightness) d. hsl (hue, shadow, lightness, opacity) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 100 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 54. _____ measures the brightness of a color and ranges from 0% (black) up to 100% (white). a. Hue b. Saturation c. Lightness d. Darkness ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 55. Graphic designers consider _____ easier to use because it allows them to set the initial color based on hue and then fine-tune the saturation and lightness values. a. HTML b. CSS c. HSL d. HTM ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 100 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 56. _____ defines how solid a color appears. a. Clarity b. Saturation c. Lightness d. Opacity ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 100 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Working with Color in CSS Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

57. How is background color defined in a Cascaded Style Sheets (CSS) file? a. @bgcolor “color”; b. @background=”color”; c. background: color; d. background-color: color; ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 101 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 58. To set the foreground or text color of an element, use the following property: a. text: color; b. forecolor: color; c. color: color; d. backcolor: color; ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 101 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 59. A technique known as _____ places code conforming to older standards before newer properties, providing support for old browsers but still allowing newer standards and techniques to be used by the browsers that support them.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS a. progressive enhancement b. opacity enhancement c. opacity enhancement d. pseudo-class structuring ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 104 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Employing Progressive Enhancement KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 60. The color scheme that uses two hues close to one another on the color wheel in which one color is the dominant color and the other is a supporting color used only for highlights and nuance is _____. a. triad b. tetrad c. analogic d. monochrome ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 104 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Progressive Enhancement KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Analyze DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 61. To direct a style rule to specific elements, _____ can be used to match only those page elements that correspond to a specified pattern. a. web fonts b. pseudo-classes c. descendant elements d. selector patterns ANSWER: d Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 108 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 62. A _____ element is an element that contains one or more other elements, which are called child elements. a. family b. sibling c. parent d. descendant ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 108 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 63. Each child element may contain children of its own and so forth down the hierarchy, creating a set of _____ elements that are all descended from a common parent. a. descendant b. child c. parent d. sibling ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 108 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 64. The style rule * {color: blue;} uses the asterisk (*) selector—also known as the _____ selector—to select all elements in a document. a. character b. text c. wildcard d. object ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 109 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 65. _____ selectors are used to select elements based on elements that are adjacent to them in the document hierarchy. a. Parent b. Child c. Sibling d. Descendant ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 109 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM

66. Identify a contextual selector that matches any element. a. % b. * c. elem d. elem1, elem2, …

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 109 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 67. Identify an attribute selector used to select an element based on its class value. a. class: .intro.elem b. elem.class c. elem#class d. class *elem ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 111 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.06 - Work with attribute selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 68. Two attributes, _____, are often key in targeting styles to specific elements. a. id and char b. id and class c. id and type d. id and elem Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 111 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.06 - Work with attribute selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 69. Identify an attribute selector that recognizes groups of elements that share a similar characteristic or property. a. id b. pseudo-element c. class d. list-style-position ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 111 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.06 - Work with attribute selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 70. Identify an attribute selector that selects all elem elements whose att attribute begins with text. a. elem[att|=”text”] b. elem[att^=”text”] c. elem[att$=”text”] d. elem[att˜=”text”] ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 112 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.06 - Work with attribute selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 71. Which of the following attribute selectors selects all elem elements whose att attribute ends with text? a. elem[att*=”text”] b. elem[att^=”text”] c. elem[att|=”text”] d. elem[att$=”text”] ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 112 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.06 - Work with attribute selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 72. Identify a generic font group that is a typeface in which each character has the same width. a. sans-serif b. monospace c. fantasy d. cursive ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 116 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS 73. A typeface, best used in small doses for decorative page elements, that mimics handwriting with highly stylized elements and flourishes is _____. a. serif b. monospace c. fantasy d. cursive ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 116 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 74. A typeface in which a small ornamentation appears at the tail end of each character is _____. a. sans-serif b. serif c. monospace d. fantasy ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 116 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 75. A general rule for printing is to use _____ fonts for headlines and serif fonts for body text. a. fantasy b. sans-serif c. monospace d. cursive ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 116 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 76. Which of the following is an example of web safe font stacks? a. Calibri b. Book Antiqua c. Bell MT d. Verdana ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 116 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.08 - Use a web font NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 77. Identify a rule that should be added to a style sheet to access and load a web font. a. @font-face b. font-style: type; c. aside: {font-family} d. @charset “utf-8”; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 118 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.08 - Use a web font Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Working with Fonts Bloom's:Understand 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

78. Which of the following browsers supports the web font format “Embedded OpenType”? a. Safari b. Internet Explorer (IE) c. Chrome d. Firefox ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 118 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.08 - Use a web font NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 79. _____ units are specified in one of five standard units of measurement. a. Relative b. Absolute c. Standard d. Uppercase ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 121 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 80. _____ units express font size according to the size of other objects within a web page.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS a. Absolute b. Relative c. Standard d. Output ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 121 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 81. A(n) _____ represents a single dot on an output device. a. element b. icon c. link d. pixel ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 122 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 82. The _____ unit is the preferred style unit for web page text because it makes it easy to develop pages in which different page elements have consistent relative font sizes under any device. a. in b. ft c. em d. en ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 122 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 83. Identify a relative unit in which lengths are expressed as a percentage of the width or height of a browser window. a. Attribute unit b. Viewport unit c. rem unit d. Absolute unit ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 123 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 84. Identify a typographic attribute that measures the amount of space between characters. a. Tracking b. Dithering c. Kerning d. Pacing ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 125 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Controlling Spacing and Indentation Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

85. _____ measures the amount of space between words. a. Kerning b. Tracking c. Pacing d. Dithering ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 125 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Controlling Spacing and Indentation KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 86. The default value for both kerning and tracking is _____ pixels. a. 8 b. 0 c. 2 d. 5 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 125 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Controlling Space and Indentation KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 87. Extending the first line of text to the left of a text block creates a _____ indent.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS a. tracking b. kerning c. leading d. hanging ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 126 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Controlling Space and Indentation KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 88. Which of the following properties is used to control the casing of text within an element? a. font-variant b. text-transform c. text-align d. font-style ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 127 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Font Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 89. Identify a property used to align text horizontally. a. text-align: alignment; b. align-text: horizontal; c. horizontal-align: alignment; d. align-text: baseline; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 128 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Font Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 90. The _____ value of the vertical-align property aligns the bottom of the element with the bottom of the text in a line. a. baseline b. bottom c. text-bottom d. sub ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 128 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Font Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 91.

Which of the following list styles should be applied to the ol element to display an unordered list with markers as shown below?

• • • •

Home Getting Started Scrapbooking Tips Supply List

a. ul {list-style-type: none;} b. ul {list-style-type: upper-greek;} c. ul {list-style-type: circle;} d. ul {list-style-type: disc;} ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 134 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.09 - Define list styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Formatting Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 92. Nested lists can be displayed in a(n) _____ style through the use of contextual selectors. a. embedded b. outline c. hierarchy d. tree ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 134 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.09 - Define list styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Formatting Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 93. The style rule ul {list-style-image: url(redball.png);} displays items from _____ lists marked with the graphic image in the redball.png file. a. ordered b. unordered c. unstructured d. structured ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 137 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.09 - Define list styles Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Formatting Lists Bloom's: Apply 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

94. Identify a padding property used to set the width of the padding space. a. padding: font; b. padding: pixel; c. padding: style; d. padding: size; ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 140 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Margins and Padding KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 95. Identify a pseudo-class which is the first descendant of the parent that matches the specified type. a. :first-of-type b. :first-child c. :only-of-type d. :only-child ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 145 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.11 - Use pseudo-classes and pseudo-elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes and Pseudo-Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 96. A _____ is a classification of an element based on its current status, position, or use in a document.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS a. pseudo-class b. pseudo-element c. pseudo-text d. pseudo-style ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 145 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.11 - Use pseudo-classes and pseudo-elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes and Pseudo-Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 97. Another type of pseudo-class is _____ pseudo-class in which the class can change state based on the actions of a user. a. static b. dynamic c. structured d. unstructured ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 148 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.11 - Use pseudo-classes and pseudo-elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes and Pseudo Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 98. The _____ pseudo-class represents the exact instant in which a link is activated. a. link b. visited c. active d. open-quote ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 149 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Controlling Space and Indentation KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 99. Which of the following dynamic pseudo-classes means the link has not yet been visited by a user? a. :link b. :nvisited c. :active d. :hover ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 149 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.11 - Use pseudo-classes and pseudo-elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes and Pseudo-Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 100. The _____ pseudo-class is to be used for a situation in which a user has moved the mouse pointer over a hypertext link prior to clicking the link. a. active b. root c. link d. hover ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 149 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.11 - Use pseudo-classes and pseudo-elements Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Using Pseudo-Classes and Pseudo-Elements Bloom's: Understand 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

101. _____, another type of pseudo selector, is an object that exists only in the rendered page. a. Pseudo-class b. Pseudo-element c. Pseudo-object d. Pseudo-type ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 151 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.11 - Use pseudo-classes and pseudo-elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes and Pseudo-Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 102. Identify a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) selector that is used to select pseudo-elements. a. element::pseudo-element b. element:pseudo-element c. element::“pseudo”; d. element:“pseudo-element” ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 151 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.11 - Use pseudo-classes and pseudo-elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes and Pseudo-Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 103. Identify the format to add new content before an element with Cascading Style Sheets (CSS).

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS a. element:before open-quote; b. element::before {content: open-quote;} c. element:before text; d. element::before {content: text;} ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 152 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.12 - Insert page content with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Generating Content with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 104. Identify an element used for quoted material. a. a b. q c. wbr d. content ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 154 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.12 - Insert page content with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Inserting Quotation Marks KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 105. Decorative opening and closing quotation marks can be inserted using the _____ property. a. label b. type c. content d. deco ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 154 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.12 - Insert page content with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Inserting Quotation Marks KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 3-1 Alex’s woodworking shop is trying to design a web page with Cascading Style Sheets (CSS). Alex would like create the new design based on the latest elements and styles from Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) and CSS. He has created a few sample pages: home.htm ---describes the business and contact information Product.htm ---displays a list of product descriptions Custom.htm ---displays a list of custom products 106. Alex wants to create styles that apply only to the HTML document in which they are created. Help Alex in selecting an appropriate style to be used for this purpose. a. External style b. Inline style c. Embedded style d. User-defined style ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 87 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 107. Alex had forgotten to give any style for all of his pages. In this case, identify the style that would be applied to his pages. a. User defined style Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS b. External style c. User agent style d. View render style ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 87 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 108. Alex’s product style rules can be imported into a single file by adding the command _____. a. @import url (css.product); b. @import url (product.css); c. @import css (product.css); d. @import (type: css url: product); ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 97 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 3-2 Terry is building a web site and wants to have three main links called Home, Product Info, and Contact Us. She will create a hierarchy of page elements and revise the style sheets.

109. In this case, the Home page contains two _____ elements.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS a. child b. parent c. sibling d. descendant ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 108 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 110. Terry has decided to display the text of all h1 headings found within the page header in green. The style rule applied should be _____. a. header h1 {shade: green;} b. header h1 {green: shade;} c. header h1 {green: color;} d. header h1 {color: green;} ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 90 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Style Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 111. To apply a style to all elements in a document, Terry should use the _____ selector. a. e b. f c. * Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS d. + ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 109 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 112. If Terry decides to select all elements belonging to the main class, he should use the _____ selector. a. .main b. p.main c. #main.intro d. main[href] ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 112 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 3-3 Tim is creating a web page to display his poker club’s set of rules. He has main categories and subcategories along with about a paragraph or more of explanation for each.

113. Tim should use what type of font for the body text of his page? a. serif b. monospace c. cursive Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS d. fantasy ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 116 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.08 - Use a web font NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 114. Tim wants to display the subcategories in capital letters but does not want them to appear more important than the main categories, so he small capital letters. Which style should he use? a. text-transform b. font-transform c. font-variant d. text-variant ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 127 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Font Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 115. Tim wants to align the top of the element with the top of the font of the surrounding content. Which value of the vertical-align property should he use? a. baseline b. super c. top d. text-top ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 128 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Font Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Completion 116. _________ styles are added as element attributes within a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) document and thus apply to that element alone.

ANSWER: Inline POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 87 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 117. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) support _________, which are numerical expressions that precisely describe colors.

ANSWER: color values POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 98 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 49

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS 118. Each color is represented by a set of numbers called a(n) _________ that represents the intensity of its red, green, and blue components.

ANSWER: RGB triplet POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 98 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 119. A(n) _________ number is a number expressed in the base 16 numbering system rather than in the commonly used base 10 system.

ANSWER: hexadecimal POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 120. The _________ color scheme uses two hues separated by 180° on the color wheel and is the most vibrant, offering the highest contrast and visual interest, but can be misused and might distract users from the page content.

ANSWER: complementary POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 104 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Progressive Enhancement KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Analyze DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 50

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM

121. Each child element may contain children of its own and so forth down the hierarchy, creating a set of _________ that are all descended from a common parent.

ANSWER: descendant elements POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 108 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 122. _________ matches any element in the hierarchy.

ANSWER: *, wildcard selector POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 109 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 123. To select all elements with the class value run, the _________ attribute selector must be used.

ANSWER: .run POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 112 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.05 - Use contextual selectors NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Selector Patterns KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 51

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM

124. A _________ font describes the general appearance of the characters in a text but does not specify any particular font definition file.

ANSWER: generic POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 115 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 125. _________ is the art of designing the appearance of characters and letters on a page.

ANSWER: Typography POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 115 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 126. _________ is a typeface without any serif ornamentation.

ANSWER: Sans-serif sans-serif POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 116 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Fonts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 52

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

127. _________ units are units that are fixed in size regardless of the device rendering the web page.

ANSWER: Absolute POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 121 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 128. To cope with the uncertainty about how their pages will be viewed, many web page designers opt to use _________ units, which are expressed relative to the size of other objects within the web page.

ANSWER: relative POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 121 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: - Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 129. The text size is defined using the _________ property.

ANSWER: font-size POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 121 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 53

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

130. Since a page designer doesn’t know the exact properties of a user’s device, the common practice is to make the text _________ with all font sizes expressed relative to a default font size.

ANSWER: scalable POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 122 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 131. In the _________ unit, all font sizes are always expressed relative to the font size used in the html element.

ANSWER: rem root em

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 122 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.07 - Apply text and font styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting the Font Size KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 132. _________, a typographic feature, measures the amount of space between lines of text.

ANSWER: Leading POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 125 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Controlling Space and Indentation Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 54

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

133. _________, a typographic feature, measures the amount of space between words.

ANSWER: Tracking POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 125 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Controlling Space and Indentation KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 134. Block-level elements like paragraphs or headings or lists follow the structure of the _________ in which the content is enclosed within a series of concentric boxes.

ANSWER: box model POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 139 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Margins and Padding KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 135. The _________ in the box model extends from the element’s content to a border.

ANSWER: padding space POINTS: 1 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Matching Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 55

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS Identify the letters of the choices that best match the phrases or definitions. a. Color value b. RGB triplet c. Style rule d. Absolute units e. Hexadecimal f. Saturation g. Relative units h. Pixel i. Tracking j. Kerning k. Leading l. ems DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 121 HTML 122 HTML 125 HTML 90 HTML 98 HTML 99 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.02 - Study different types of style sheets 02.04 - Apply colors in CSS 02.07 - Apply text and font styles 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Controlling Spacing and Indentation Exploring Style Rules Setting the Font Size Working with Color in CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember | Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 136. It defines the styles applied to an element or group of elements.

ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 137. It is a numerical representation that precisely describes a color.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 138. They are numbers that represent a color according to the intensity of its red, green, and blue components.

ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 56

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS POINTS: 1 139. It is a number expressed in the base-16 numbering system.

ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 140. It measures the intensity of a chosen color and ranges from 0% (no color) to 100% (full color).

ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 141. They are the units expressed relative to the size of other objects within a web page.

ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 142. They are specified in one of five standard units of measurement.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 143. It represents a single dot on an output device.

ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 144. It is a relative measurement to provide scalability.

ANSWER: l POINTS: 1 145. It measures the amount of space between words.

ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 146. It measures the amount of space between lines of text.

ANSWER: k POINTS: 1 147. It measures the amount of space between characters.

ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 Essay 148. Explain the styles to control some basic typographic attributes, such as kerning, tracking, and leading. Also, mention when a hanging indent is created.

ANSWER: Kerning measures the amount of space between characters, while tracking measures the amount of space between words. The properties to control an element’s kerning and tracking are letter-spacing: value; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 57

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 02: Getting Started with CSS word-spacing: value; where value is the size of space between individual letters or words. These sizes can be specified with the same units as used for font sizing. The default value for both kerning and tracking in 0 pixels. A positive value increases the letter and word spacing, while a negative value reduces the space between letters and words.

Leading measures the amount of space between lines of text and is set using the following line-height property: line-height: size; where size is a value or a percentage of the font size of the text on the affected lines. If no unit is specified, the size value represents the ratio of the line height to the font size. The default value is 1.2 or 1.2em so that the line height is 20% larger than the font size. By contrast, the following style sets the line height to twice the font size, making the text appear double-spaced: line-height: 2em; An additional way to control text spacing is to set the indentation for the first line of a text block by using the following text-indent property: text-indent: size; where size is expressed in absolute or relative units, or as a percentage of the width of the text block. For example, an indentation value of 5% indents the first line by 5% of the width of the block. The indentation value can be negative, extending the first line to the left of the text block to create a hanging indent.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 125 - HTML 126 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 02.10 - Work with margins and padding space NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Controlling Spacing and Indentation KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 58

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout True / False 1. The display property inherit inherits the display property of a child element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 172 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the display Style KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 2. Whether an element is displayed as a block or as inline depends on the style sheet. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 172 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the display Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 3. Many designers prefer to work with a “clean state” and not have any browser style rules creep into the final design of their website. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 172 QUESTION TYPE: True / False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Reset Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4. One can prevent browsers from displaying an element by setting its display property to inline. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 172 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the display Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 5. Setting the display style to none hides an element but does not remove it from the page flow. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 172 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the display Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 6. Web page layouts fall into three general categories: fixed, fluid, and elastic. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 176 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Page Layout Designs KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 7. One challenge of layout is that the document will be viewed on many different devices with the same screen resolution. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 176 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Reset Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 8. Fixed layouts should only be used when one has more control over the devices that will display the page. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 177 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Page Layout Designs KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

9. Centering an element vertically within its parent element is easily accomplished as the height of the parent element is defined by a value. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 182 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.03 - Center a block element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Width and Height KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 10. New content can be easily placed within a grid in a way that is consistent with previously entered information. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 203 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Grid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 11. A popular design element is the inline-block, which consists of an enlarged initial letter in a body of text that drops down into the text body. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout REFERENCES: HTML 218 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 12. Setting up a grid decreases the size and complexity of the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) code by adding another level of markup. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 219 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS Grids KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 13. Users find it easier to scan content when page elements are aligned vertically and horizontally. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 222 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.10 - Explore the CSS grid styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS grids KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout 14. To place an object with absolute positioning, use either the top/left coordinates or the bottom/right coordinates but not all four coordinates at the same time. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 228 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.11 - Exploring positioning styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 15. If a container has been placed with absolute or relative positioning, then any object nested within it can be placed with absolute positioning. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 228 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.11 - Exploring positioning styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 16. The position property can be set to depend so that an element inherits the position value of its parent element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 230 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.11 - Exploring positioning styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 17. A value of auto for the overflow property instructs browsers to increase the height of an element to fit the overflow content. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 240 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 18. To specify a different stacking order for elements, the clip property can be used. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 244 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 19. The z-index property works only for elements that are placed with relative positioning. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 244 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 20. Rhythm is the ability to combine different design elements into a cohesive whole. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 245 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Modified True / False 21. A fluid layout is one in which the size of a web page and the size of the elements within it are set regardless of the screen resolution.

ANSWER: False - fixed POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Remember REFERENCES: HTML 176 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Page Layout Designs Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

22. A fixed layout sets the width of the page elements as a percent of the available screen width.

ANSWER: False - fluid POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 177 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Page Layout Designs KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 23. In fluid layouts, all measurements are expressed in em units and based on the default font size used in the page.

ANSWER: False - elastic POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 177 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Page Layout Designs KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 24. Stacking an element takes that element out of the normal flow of the document and positions it along the left or right edge of its containing element.

ANSWER: False - Floating POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 183 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.05 - Clear a floating layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

25. In a fluid grid, the widths of the columns and margins are specified in pixels.

ANSWER: False - fixed POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 203 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Grid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 26. In a fixed grid, the column widths are expressed in percentages rather than pixels.

ANSWER: False - fluid POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 203 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Grid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 27. A framework is a software package that provides a library of tools to design a website, including style sheets for grid layouts and built-in scripts to provide support for a variety of browsers and devices.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 204 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS Grids Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

28. The width of the line used in an outline is defined by the outline-style property.

ANSWER: False - outline-width POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 216 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.09 - Format a grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 29. Relative positioning places an element at specific coordinates either in the page or within a container element.

ANSWER: False - Absolute POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 227 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.13 - Work with absolute positioning NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 30. If an object within a browser window has to be fixed so that it doesn’t scroll, it can set its position property to fixed.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 230 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.11 - Exploring positioning styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

31. The item marked 2 in Figure 3.1 represents the hidden value of the overflow property.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 241 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Fig 3.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 32. The item marked 4 in Figure 3.1 represents the scroll value of the overflow property.

ANSWER: False - auto Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 241 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Fig 3.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 33. The item marked 1 in Figure 3.1 represents the visible value of the overflow property.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 241 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Fig 3.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 34. The open-space property defines how browsers should handle white space in a rendered document.

ANSWER: False - white-space POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 243 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 35. The z-index property stacks overlapping objects with the highest z-index value on top of the others.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 244 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Multiple Choice 36. The display type value _____ is displayed as a block unless its next sibling is also a block, in which case, it is displayed in-line, essentially combining the two blocks into one. a. block b. run-in c. none d. inline ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 172 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the display Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 37. The _____ value of the display style removes an element from a rendered page. a. null b. none c. empty d. hide ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 172 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the display Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 38. A(n) _____ supersedes a browser’s default styles and provides a consistent starting point for page design. a. elastic layout b. content box c. fixed grid d. reset style sheet ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 172 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Reset Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 39. What is the value of the list-style that will cause no marker to be displayed? a. empty b. null c. void d. none ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 174 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Create a Reset Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

40. In a fixed layout, the size of the page and the size of the page elements are fixed using _____ as the unit of measure. a. ems b. fractions c. percentage d. pixels ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 176 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Page Layout Designs KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 41. A _____ is one in which the size of the web page and the size of its elements are set regardless of the screen resolution. a. fluid layout b. fixed layout c. liquid layout d. stationary layout ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 177 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Explore Page Layout Designs KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 42. A _____ sets the width of page elements as a percent of the available screen width. a. fixed layout b. standard layout Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout c. fluid layout d. stationary layout ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 177 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Explore Page Layout Designs KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 43. Some designers propose the use of _____ in which all measurements are expressed relative to the default font size using the em unit. a. liquid layouts b. fixed layouts c. fluid layouts d. elastic layouts ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 177 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Explore Page Layout Designs KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 44. All block elements, like the body element, have a default width of _____. a. 50% b. 150% c. 0% d. 100% ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout REFERENCES: HTML 178 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.07 - Explore grid-based layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Width and Height KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 45. To center an element vertically within its parent element, display the parent element as a table cell with a defined height and then set the vertical-align property to _____. a. left b. middle c. right d. top ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 182 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.07 - Explore grid-based layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Width and Height KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 46. Identify the default clear value that allows an element to be displayed alongside any floated objects. a. none b. left c. right d. middle ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 187 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.05 - Clear a floating layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Floating Page Content Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

47. The width property of the _____ model is based on the sum of the content, padding, and border spaces and any space taken up by the padding and border is subtracted from space given to the content. a. border box b. padding box c. content box d. margin box ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 191 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.05 - Clear a floating layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 48. Identify the property that is used to choose the layout model. a. clear b. box-sizing c. vertical-align d. outline-style ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 192 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.04 - Create a floating element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 49. Identify the default type for the box-sizing property.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout a. inherit-box b. padding-box c. border-box d. content-box ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 192 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.04 - Create a floating element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 50. When the footer is the last element in a page body, the _____ pseudo-element is used to add a placeholder element after the footer. a. after b. first-line c. before d. first-letter ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 196 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.04 - Create a floating element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 51. Identify a true statement about grids. a. New content cannot be placed within a grid as it will be inconsistent with previously entered information. b. Grids slow down the development process for establishing a systematic framework for a page layout. c. Grids add order to the presentation of a page content without adding any visual rhythm. d. A well designed grid is more easily accessible for users with disabilities and special needs.

ANSWER: d Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 203 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Grid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 52. A layout for a mobile device is typically based on a _____ grid. a. 6-column b. 1-column c. 13-column d. 12-column ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 203 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.07 - Explore grid-based layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Grid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 53. Tablet layouts are based on grids of _____ columns. a. 4 to 12 b. 1 to 3 c. 0 d. 12 or more ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 203 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.07 - Explore grid-based layouts Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Introducing Grid Layouts Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

54. Desktop layouts are often based on layouts with _____ columns. a. 4 to 12 b. 1 to 3 c. 0 d. 12 or more ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 203 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.07 - Explore grid-based layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Grid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 55. Which of the following is a popular Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) framework? a. Flex Unit 4 b. Medoo c. Skeleton d. Spark ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 204 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Grid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 56. Identify the element that marks the distinct rows and columns of a grid to give a consistent structure to floating Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout objects. a. head b. div c. margin d. p ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 204 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.07 - Explore grid-based layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Grid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 57. Which of the following class names is used to indicate a column with a width of 25%? a. <div class= "col-25%"></div> b. <div class="col-1-4"></div> c. <div class="col-1/4"></div> d. <div class="col-0.25px"></div> ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 205 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting up a grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 58. Identify the attribute selector that matches all div elements whose class attribute begins with the text string "col-". a. div[class^="col-"] b. div[class|="col-"] c. div[class$="col-"] d. div[class˜="col-"] ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 209 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Setting up a grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Analyze DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 59. Which of the following style rules is used to draw a 1px red dotted line around every element on a web page along with a wildcard selector? a. *{outline: 1px dotted red;} b. *{outline-style: 1px dotted red} c. *{outline-style=”1px red dotted”} d. *{outline: 1px, red, dotted;} ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 216 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 60. Which of the following can be used to express value in the outline-width property outline-width: value;? a. dotted b. thick c. dashed d. double ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 216 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.09 - Format a grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 61. In the outline-style property outline-style: style; style can be set to _____ for displaying a single line. a. groove b. none c. solid d. outset ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 216 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.09 - Format a grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 62. Which of the following statements is true of outline styles? a. An outline does not surround an entire element. b. There are separate outline styles for the left, right, top, or bottom edge of an object. c. An outline adds values to the width and height of an object. d. All of the outline styles properties can be combined into the outline shorthand property.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 216 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.09 - Format a grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM

63. A(n) _____ is a line drawn around an element, enclosing the element content, padding, and border spaces. a. border b. margin c. outline d. inline ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 216 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Width KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 64. Which of the following can be used to express style in the outline-style property outline-style: style;? a. thin b. thick c. ridge d. medium ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 216 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Analyze DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 65. _____ is a popular design element which consists of an enlarged initial letter in a body of text that drops down into the text body. a. Drop cap b. Title cap c. Camel cap Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout d. Frame cap ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 218 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 66. To create a drop-cap, one can increase the font size of an element’s _____ and float it on the left margin. a. first line b. hyperlink c. first letter d. ridge ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 218 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 67. Drop caps look better if the first letter’s _____. a. line height is increased b. line height is decreased c. width is decreased d. width is increased ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 218 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Outlining a Grid KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 68. Identify a grid-based property that is a space-separated list of row heights or column widths. a. grid-template-row b. grid-template-column c. track-list d. inline-list ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 219 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.10 - Explore the CSS grid styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS Grids KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 69. The _____ unit can be thought of as a share of available space. a. wbr b. em c. fr d. grid-template ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 220 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS Grids KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM

70. Once a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) grid is established, a specific element within a _____ is placed at the intersection of a specified row and column. a. stack b. grid cell c. sibling element d. track-list ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 220 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.10 - Explore the CSS grid styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS Grids KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 71. Internet Explorer supports grid styles using the _____ browser prefix. a. -msb. -frc. -ied. -wbrANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 221 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.10 - Explore the CSS grid styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS Grids KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 72. Browsers ignore any values specified for the left or top properties under _____ positioning. a. absolute b. static c. elastic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout d. inherited ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 226 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.11 - Exploring positioning styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Explore positioning styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 73. _____ positioning is essentially the same as not using any Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) positioning at all. a. Static b. Relative c. Absolute d. Elastic ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 226 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.11 - Exploring positioning styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 74. _____ is used to nudge an element out of its normal position in a document flow. a. Absolute positioning b. Relative positioning c. Static positioning d. Fixed positioning ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 226 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.12 - Work with relative positioning NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 75. _____ places an element at specific coordinates either in a page or within a container element. a. Absolute positioning b. Relative positioning c. Static positioning d. Inherited positioning ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 227 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.12 - Work with relative positioning NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 76. The coordinates for the section element need not be defined as long as its position is set to _____. a. absolute b. fixed c. relative d. static ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 228 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM

77. Identify a property that a browser can use to handle excess content. a. clip b. article c. overflow d. border ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 240 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 78. The _____ value of the overflow style keeps an element at a specified size, adding scroll bars only as they are needed. a. scroll b. visible c. auto d. hidden ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 240 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 79. The _____ value of the overflow style keeps the element at a specified height and width, but cuts off excess content. a. auto b. scroll c. hidden d. visible Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 240 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 80. The scroll value of the overflow style keeps the element at the specified dimensions, but adds horizontal and vertical scroll bars to allow users to scroll through the _____ content. a. roll backed b. overflowed c. text-flowed d. in-flowed ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 240 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 81. Which of the following is the default overflow property? a. visible b. hidden c. scroll d. auto ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 240 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 82. In the overflow property, a value of _____ instructs browsers to increase the height of an element to fit the overflow content. a. hidden b. visible c. scroll d. auto ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 240 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout

83. The item marked _____ in Figure 3.1 represents the visible value of the overflow property. a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 241 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Fig 3.3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 84. Which item in Figure 3.1 represents the scroll overflow style?

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 241 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Fig 3.3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 85. Which of the following is the syntax of the clip property? a. clip: rect(top, left, bottom, right); b. clip: rect(top, right, bottom, left); c. clip: rect(bottom, top, right, left); d. clip: rect(bottom, right, top, left); ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 243 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Clipping an Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 86. Identify the style that should be applied to remove clipping completely from an element. a. clip: none b. clip: hidden c. clip: left d. clip: auto ANSWER: d Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 244 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Clipping an Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 87. Clipping can only be applied when an object is placed using _____ positioning. a. absolute b. static c. relative d. fixed ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 244 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.13 - Work with absolute positioning NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Clipping an Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 88. Scroll bars for overflow content are usually placed _____ so that one can scroll down to view the extra content. a. horizontally b. vertically c. in the corners d. at the bottom ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 243 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Work with overflow content Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

89. The _____ property allows one to define a rectangular region through which an element’s content can be viewed. a. crop b. static c. auto d. clip ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 243 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Clipping an element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 90. In z-index: value; property, value is a(n) _____. a. fraction b. imaginary number c. integer d. decimal ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 244 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 91. In the z-index property, the value of _____ stacks the object using default rules.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout a. left b. hidden c. auto d. none ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 244 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 92. When a rectangular region is defined using an appropriate style, which value matches the specified edge of the clipping region to the edge of the parent element? a. right b. default c. auto d. left ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 244 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Clipping an element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 93. To specify a stacking order, one can use the _____ property. a. index b. layer c. z-layer d. z-index ANSWER: d Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 244 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 94. _____, a principle of design, involves the distribution of elements. a. Unity b. Balance c. Contrast d. Rhythm ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 245 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 95. _____, a principle of design, is the repetition or alternation of a design element in order to provide a sense of movement, flow, and progress. a. Unity b. Balance c. Rhythm d. Emphasis ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 245 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 96. _____, a principle of design, involves working with the focal point of a design. a. Balance b. Rhythm c. Emphasis d. Unity ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 245 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Ken has built a website for his assignment. He has created a blue background image for each link to the chapters that appear on the site. Also, each link appears in green without underlines.

97. Ken can space the links equally across the browser window, to make the page text easier to read, by changing the _____. a. text-align b. width c. font-size d. height ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 178 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 3-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Working with Width and Height Bloom’s: Apply 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

98. Which of the following styles has Ken most likely used to remove the underline from links? a. text-format b. text-decoration c. text-align d. text-font ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 174 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 3-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Create a Reset Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM The Yacht club has a web site that consists of a picture of the yacht club room along with the yacht club rules on the left.

On the right side is a list of upcoming events, the company logo, and the yacht club teacher training dates. Sue, the web designer, needs some help with Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to make sure the pages display correctly.

99. Which display value would work best to prevent the pictures from displaying when the web page loads? a. inherit b. run-in c. block d. none ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 172 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 3-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the display Style Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Apply 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

100. Sue needs to create a _____ style sheet so that no unwanted styles can creep in from any browser’s internal style sheet. a. redesign b. reset c. design d. planned ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 172 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 3-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Create a Reset Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 101. To make the webpage display the yacht club rules in a bulleted list, _____ should be used. a. display: list-item b. display: item-list c. display: list d. display: top-list ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 172 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 3-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Create a Reset Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout Completion 102. In a(n) _________ page layout, all measurements are expressed in em units and based on the default font size used in the page.

ANSWER: elastic POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 177 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Page Layout Designs KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 103. The web is moving quickly toward the principles of _________ design in which the layout and design of a page changes in response to the device that is rendering it.

ANSWER: responsive POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 177 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Page Layout Designs KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 104. Block elements can be centered horizontally within their parent element by setting both the left and right margins to _________.

ANSWER: auto POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 181 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.03 - Center a block element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Width and Height Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

105. If _________ elements are floated along the same margin, they are placed alongside each other within a row.

ANSWER: sibling POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 183 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.05 - Clear a floating layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 106. _________ an element takes it out of position and places it along the left or right edge of its parent element.

ANSWER: Floating POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 183 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.05 - Clear a floating layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 107. To ensure that an element is always displayed below floating elements, the _________ property should be applied.

ANSWER: clear POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 187 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.05 - Clear a floating layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

108. In refining a floated layout, by default, browsers measure widths using the _________ box model in which the width property only refers to the width of the element content and any padding or borders constitute added space.

ANSWER: content POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 191 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.04 - Create a floating element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 109. Block elements are laid out in a webpage according to the _________ model.

ANSWER: box POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 191 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.04 - Create a floating element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 110. In refining a floated layout, Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) support the _________ box model in which the width property is based on the sum of the content, padding, and border spaces and any space taken up by the padding and border is subtracted from space given to the content.

ANSWER: border POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 191 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.04 - Create a floating element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Floating Page Content Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

111. A situation in which a container is empty and has no height and no background to color is known as _________.

ANSWER: container collapse POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 195 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.06 - Prevent container collapse NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Floating Page Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 112. The Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) grid styles introduced the _________ unit, which represents the fraction of available space left on the grid after all other rows or columns have attained their maximum allowable size.

ANSWER: fr POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 219 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.10 - Explore the CSS grid styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing CSS Grids KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 113. static, relative, absolute, fixed, and inherit are the five kinds of _________ supported by Cascading Style Sheets (CSS).

ANSWER: positioning POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 226 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.11 - Exploring positioning styles Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Positioning Objects Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

114. _________ positioning is used to nudge an element out of its normal position in a document flow.

ANSWER: Relative POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 226 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.12 - Work with relative positioning NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 115. In _________ positioning, an element is placed where it would have fallen naturally within the flow of a document.

ANSWER: static POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 226 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.11 - Exploring positioning styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 116. _________ positioning places an element at specific coordinates either in a page or within a container element.

ANSWER: Absolute POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 227 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.13 - Work with absolute positioning NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Positioning Objects Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

117. The _________ value of the overflow style keeps the element at a specified size, adding scroll bars only as they are needed.

ANSWER: auto POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 240 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 118. The white-space property of an element is set to _________, which keeps inline content on a single line, preventing line wrapping.

ANSWER: nowrap POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 243 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Handling Overflow KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 119. The _________ property, closely related to the overflow property, defines a rectangular region through which an element’s content can be viewed.

ANSWER: clip POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 243 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 49

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Clipping an Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 120. _________ is the ability to combine different design elements into a cohesive whole.

ANSWER: Unity POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 245 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 121. The design principle _________ consists of the differences among all of the page elements.

ANSWER: contrast POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 245 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.02 - Explore page layout designs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Stacking Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM Matching Identify the letters of the choices that best match the phrases or definitions. a. Reset style sheet b. Fluid layout c. Clipping d. static e. absolute f. relative g. Fixed layout h. inherit i. none j. run-in Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 50

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout k. Elastic layout DIFFICULTY:

l. z-index Easy Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 172 HTML 176 HTML 177 HTML 226 HTML 227 HTML 243 HTML 244 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet 03.02 - Explore page layout designs 03.11 - Exploring positioning styles 03.14 - Work with overflow content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the display Style Creating a Reset Style Sheet Exploring Page Layout Designs Positioning Objects Handling Overflow Stacking Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember | Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 122. Prevents an element from displaying, removing it from the page structure ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 123. Supersedes a browser’s default styles and provides a consistent starting point for page design ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 124. Uses pixels as the unit of measure ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 125. Uses percentage as the unit of measure ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 126. Expresses measurements in em units ANSWER: k POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 51

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout 127. The default positioning style ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 128. Displays an element as a block unless its next sibling is also a block ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 129. Assigns an element the display property of its parent element ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 130. A positioning used to nudge an element out of its normal position in a document flow ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 131. A positioning that enables one to place an element at specific coordinates within a container ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 132. Specifies a stacking order ANSWER: l POINTS: 1 133. Defines a rectangular region through which an element’s content can be viewed ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 Essay 134. Discuss the three categories—fixed, fluid, and elastic—of web page layouts.

ANSWER: Fixed, Fluid, and Elastic Layouts Web page layouts fall into three general categories: fixed, fluid, and elastic. A fixed layout is one in which the size of the web page and the size of the elements within it are set regardless of the screen resolution. A fluid or liquid layout defines the size of the page and its elements as a percentage of the screen width, that is, the width of the web page and its elements is proportional to the width of the screen. Fixed layouts stay the same size regardless of the screen resolution. Fluid layouts change with the screen resolution.

In general, fixed layouts are easier to set up and maintain, but they’re less pleasing to the eye when viewed on wider screens. A fluid layout may be more difficult to set up initially, but it’s more adaptable to a market in which users access the web from a variety of devices and screen resolutions. Many designers use a combination of fixed and fluid page elements, enabling them to have the best of both worlds. Another approach is to use a script that queries each browser about its screen resolution and then adapts the page to that resolution.

Finally, some designers propose the use of elastic layouts in which all measurements are expressed relative to the default font size using the em unit. If a user or the designer increases Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 52

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout the font size, then the width, height, and location of all of the other page elements, including images, change to match. Thus, images and text are always sized in proportion with each other. The disadvantage to this approach is that since sizing is based on the font size and not on the screen resolution, there is a danger that if a user sets the default font size large enough, the page will extend beyond the boundaries of the browser window.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 176 HTML 177 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.01 - Create a reset style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Reset Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 135. List the advantages of working from a grid and the basic types of grid layouts.

ANSWER: Working from a grid has several practical and aesthetical advantages, including the following: • • • • •

Grids add order to the presentation of page content, adding visual rhythm, which is pleasing to the eye.

A consistent logical design gives readers the confidence to find the information they seek.

New content can be easily placed within a grid in a way that is inconsistent with previously entered information.

A well designed grid is more easily accessible for users with disabilities and special needs.

Grids speed up the development process by establishing a systematic framework for the page layout.

There are two basic types of grid layouts: fixed grids and fluid grids.

In a fixed grid, the widths of the columns and margins are specified in pixels, where every column has a fixed position.

A fluid grid, in which column widths are expressed in percentages rather than pixels, is often used to provide more support across different devices.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 203 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.08 - Create a layout grid Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 53

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 03: Designing a Page Layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Introducing Grid Layouts Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:40 AM 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

136. Discuss the various types of Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) positioning styles.

ANSWER: CSS supports five kinds of positioning: static (the default), relative, absolute, fixed, and inherit. In static positioning, the element is placed where it would have fallen naturally within the flow of a document. This is essentially the same as not using any CSS positioning at all. Browsers ignore any values specified for the top, left, bottom, or right properties under static positioning.

Relative positioning is used to nudge an element out of its normal position in a document flow. Under relative positioning, the top, right, bottom, and left properties indicate the extra space that is placed alongside the element as it is shifted to a new position.

Absolute positioning places an element at specific coordinates within a container where the top property indicates the position of the element’s top edge, the right property sets the position of the right edge, the bottom property sets the bottom edge position, and the left property sets the position of the left edge.

To place an object with absolute positioning, use either the top/left coordinates or the bottom/right coordinates but not all four coordinates at the same time because that would confuse the browser.

When one scrolls through a document in a browser window, the page content scrolls along. If an object within the browser window has to be fixed so that it doesn’t scroll, its position property can be set to fixed.

The position property can be set to inherit so that an element inherits the position value of its parent element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Understand REFERENCES: HTML 226 HTML 227 HTML 228 HTML 229 HTML 230 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 03.11 - Exploring positioning styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Positioning Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:40 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 54

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS True / False 1. Tiling is when a browser loads a background image and then repeats the image in both the vertical and

horizontal directions until the entire background is filled. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 265 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 2. Even if the background images are hidden, the tiling process continues behind the page body. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 267 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 3. A background image is attached to its element so that as the element content is scrolled through, the

background image remains still. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

False 1 Easy HTML 267

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4. If a single value is specified in the background-position property, the browser applies that value to both the

horizontal and vertical position. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 268 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 5.

A background image can be placed using the keywords left, center, and right for the vertical position and top, center, and bottom for the horizontal position. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 268 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:41 AM

6. The background-position property is only useful for non-tiled images because a tiled image fills the

background and it usually doesn't matter where the tiling starts. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 268 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 7. By default, an element’s background is defined to extend only through the padding space and not to include

the border space. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 268 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 8. If a background extends through the border space by default, all coordinates for the image position are

measured from the bottom-left corner. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

False 1 Easy

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS REFERENCES: HTML 268 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 9. The size of a background image is smaller than the size stored in the image file. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 269 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 10. Backgrounds are added in the reverse order in which they’re listed in a style rule. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 272 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS 11. The radii of individual corners are equal to the radii of hypothetical circles placed at the corners of a box

with the arcs of the circles defining the rounded circles. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 277 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.04 - Create rounded borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 12. Multiple shadows can be added to text by including each shadow definition in a comma-separated list. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 288 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.06 - Create a text shadow NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Drop Shadows KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 13. Box shadows can only be placed outside an element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 291 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.07 - Create a box shadow NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Drop Shadows KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 14. By default, a box shadow has the same size and dimensions as its page object offset in the horizontal and

vertical direction. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 293 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.07 - Create a box shadow NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Drop Shadows KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 15. The default direction for a linear color gradient is horizontal, starting from the left of an object and moving

to the bottom. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 296 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 16. When parameters of the radial-gradient function are omitted, they take their default values. a. True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 302 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 17. The only requirement for a repeating gradient is that a stopping position is required for the first color in the

list that is less than the size of the object background. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 305 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 18. In the opacity property, if the value is 0, it means an object is completely opaque. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 307 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.09 - Set the opacity of an element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Creating Semi-Transparent Objects Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

19. A smaller perspective value causes a pair of railroad tracks to converge over an apparently shorter distance,

while a larger perspective value causes the tracks to appear to go farther before converging. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 317 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Transforming Page Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 20. Client-side image maps are easier to create but rely on a connection to the server in order to run. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 324 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 21. There is no limit to the number of hotspots one can add to an image map. a. True b. False ANSWER: True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 325 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Modified True / False 22. In the background-attachment property, the scroll type creates a background that stays in place even as the

element content is scrolled horizontally or vertically.

ANSWER: False - fixed POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 267 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 23. In the background-attachment property, the fixed type sets the background to scroll with element content.

ANSWER: False - scroll POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 267 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS 24. By default, browsers place a background image in an element’s bottom-left corner.

ANSWER: False - top-left POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 267 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 25. The sizing keyword cover tells the browser to automatically set the width or height value based on the

dimensions of the original image.

ANSWER: False - auto POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 269 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 26. The sizing keyword contain scales an image so that it is completely contained within an element, even if that

means that not all of the element background is covered.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 269 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:41 AM

27. The sizing keyword auto tells the browser to resize an image to cover all of the element background while

still retaining the image proportions.

ANSWER: False - cover POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 269 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 28. Individual background properties can contain multiple options placed in a comma-separated list.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 272 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 29. Elliptical corners can be created by specifying the ratio of the horizontal radius to the vertical radius using

the border-radius style.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 279 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.03 - Add a border to an element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

30. Slices of different widths or heights can be created by entering the size values in a comma-separated list.

ANSWER: False - space-separated POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 282 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.03 - Add a border to an element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 31. Shadows can be added to any block element in a web page by using the text-shadow property.

ANSWER: False - box-shadow POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 290 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.07 - Create a box shadow NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Drop Shadows KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 32. A radial gradient is a color gradient in which the background color transitions from a starting color to an

ending color along a straight line.

ANSWER: False - linear POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 296 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Applying a Color Gradient Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

33. A linear gradient is a color gradient that starts from a central point and proceeds outward in a series of

concentric circles.

ANSWER:

False - radial POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 301 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 34. In the radial-gradient function, the default is to place the gradient within the center of a background.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 302 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 35. In the opacity property, if the value is 1, the object is completely transparent.

ANSWER: False - opaque POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 307 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.09 - Set the opacity of an element Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating Semi-Transparent Objects Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

36. The perspective function should be used when only one object needs to be transformed in a 3D space.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 318 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Transforming Page Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Multiple Choice 37. The _____ element is used to contain an image file and can also be used to mark any page content that

should stand apart from the main content of an article. a. border b. article c. image d. figure ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 260 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.01 - Create a figure box NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Figure Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 38. Identify a true statement about the figcaption element.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS a. It is the content that will appear within a figure box. b. It is the description text that accompanies a figure. c. It is placed either directly before or directly after a figure box content. d. It is used to mark any page content to make it stand apart from the main content of an article.

ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 260 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.01 - Create a figure box NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Figure Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 39. Which of the following styles is used to specify the type of tiling to be applied to a background image, or

even turn off tiling? a. background-repeat: type; b. background-image: url(url); c. background-attachment: type; d. background-clip: type; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 265 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 40. Identify the default type for the background-repeat style. a. no-repeat b. repeat c. repeat-x d. repeat-y Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 265 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

41. In the given image, which of the following types of background property does figure 2 denote? a. no-repeat b. repeat Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS c. repeat-x d. repeat-y ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 265 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Section Break 1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 42. In the given image, which of the following types of background property does figure 4 denote? a. no-repeat b. repeat c. repeat-x d. repeat-y ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 265 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Section Break 1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 43. In the given image, which of the following types of background property does figure 6 denote? a. space b. repeat c. repeat-x d. round ANSWER:

a

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 265 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Section Break 1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 44. Identify the default type of the background-attachment property. a. space b. scroll c. local d. fixed ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 267 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 45. Which of the following background-attachment properties is similar to scroll, but is used for elements, such

as scroll boxes, to allow the element background to scroll along with the content within a box? a. space b. round c. local d. fixed ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

c 1 Easy HTML 267 Multiple Choice

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 46. Identify the property that can be used to change the definition of an element’s background. a. background-repeat: type; b. background-image: url(url); c. background-attachment: type; d. background-clip: type; ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 268 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 47. Identify the option that specifies whether an image scrolls with the content or is fixed in the following

background property: background: color url(url) position / size repeat attachment origin clip; a. position b. origin c. clip d. attachment ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 270 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Exploring Background Styles Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

48. Identify the option that defines how positions are measured on the background in the following background

property: background: color url(url) position / size repeat attachment origin clip; a. size b. origin c. clip d. attachment ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 270 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 49. Which of the following properties is used to define the thickness of a specific border? a. border-width: left; b. border-side-width: width; c. border-width: width; d. border-width-style: thick; ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 274 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.03 - Add a border to an element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

50. To round off any of the four corners of a border, the _____ property should be applied. a. border-width b. border-radius c. border-style d. border-image ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 277 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.04 - Create rounded borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 51. Identify the style that can be used to create elongated or elliptical corners. a. border-radius: horizontal/vertical; b. border-corner: style; c. border-corner: type; d. border-corner-radius: radius; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 279 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.03 - Add a border to an element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 52. Identify the property that is used to apply a border image. a. border-image: horizontal/vertical; b. border-image: style; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS c. border-image-radius: radius; d. border-image: url(url) slice repeat; ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 281 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.05 - Create a graphic border NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 53. If the slices of a graphic image do not fill the sides with an integer number of tiles, identify the repeat option

that can be used with the border-image property to rescale the slices until they do. a. round b. space c. stretch d. repeat ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 281 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.05 - Create a graphic border NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 54. Identify the repeat option in the border-image property that distributes extra space around the tiles when the

slices don’t fill the sides with an integer number of tiles. a. round b. space c. stretch d. repeat ANSWER: POINTS:

b 1

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 281 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.05 - Create a graphic border NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 55. Identify the use of the inset keyword used in the box-shadow property. a. It is used to mention the shadow color. b. It is used to measure the distances of the shadow from the text in horizontal and vertical directions. c. It is used to define the amount by which the shadow is stretched. d. It is used to create an interior shadow.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 291 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.07 - Create a box shadow NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Drop Shadows KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 56. To change the shadow size, the _____ parameter must be added to the box-shadow property, specifying the

size of the shadow relative to the size of the object. a. round b. space c. stretch d. spread ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 293 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.07 - Create a box shadow Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating Drop Shadows Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

57. The _____ size parameter of the radial-gradient function makes a gradient extend to the nearest background

corner. a. corner-side b. closest-corner c. side-corner d. farthest-corner ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 302 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 58. Which of the following is the default shape value for the radial-gradient function? a. Round b. Square c. Ellipse d. Circle ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 302 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS 59. Which of the following is the default size keyword in the radial-gradient function? a. farthest-corner b. farthest-side c. closest-corner d. closest-side ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 302 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 60. Identify a CSS3 2D transformation function that resizes an object by a factor of x horizontally. a. rotate(angleX) b. skewX(angleX) c. scaleX(x) d. translateX(offX) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 312 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Transforming Page Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 61. Identify the syntax of the transform property. a. transform: effect(params); b. transform: horizontal vertical; c. transform: radius; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS d. transform: size shape at position; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 312 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Transforming Page Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 62. Identify a CSS3 2D transformation function that resizes an object by a factor of x horizontally. a. rotate(angleY) b. skewY(angleY) c. scaleY(y) d. translateY(offY) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 312 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Transforming Page Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 63. Which of the following is true of transformations in three dimensions? a. Positive values along the axes are to the right, down, and away from a reader. b. Positive values along the axes are to the left, up, and away from a reader. c. Negative values along the axes are to the right, down, and toward a reader. d. Negative values along the axes are to the left, up, and away from a reader.

ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

d 1 Moderate HTML 316

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Transforming Page Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 64. Identify the CSS3 3D transformation function that shifts an object offX pixels horizontally, offY pixels

vertically, and offZ pixels along the z-axis. a. translate3d(offX, offY, offZ) b. perspective(p) c. rotate3d(offX, offY, offZ, angle) d. scale3d(offX, offY, offZ) ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 317 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Transforming Page Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 65. Identify a true statement about the perspective property. a. A larger perspective value causes railroad tracks to converge over an apparently shorter distance. b. The perspective property can be used when there are several transformed objects within a container

that all need to appear within the same 3D space within a common perspective. c. A smaller perspective value causes the railroad tracks to appear to go farther before converging. d. The perspective property uses a negative value that measures the strength of the perspective effect with higher values resulting in more extreme distortion.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 317-HTML 318 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Transforming Page Objects Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

66. A final way to alter an object is through a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) _____. a. filter b. box model c. border property d. visual design style ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 320 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.11 - Apply a CSS filter NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring CSS Filters KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 67. Which of the following angles used in the filter function hue-rotate (angle) displays the complimentary

colors? a. 0deg b. 180deg c. 90deg d. 360deg ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 321 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.11 - Apply a CSS filter NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring CSS Filters KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS 68. Which of the following values decreases the brightness in the filter function brightness? a. Values less than 0 b. Values from 2 to 5 c. Values from 0 to 1 d. Values greater than 5 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 321 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.11 - Apply a CSS filter NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring CSS Filters KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 69. Which of the following Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) 3 filters applies transparency to an image? a. blur b. invert c. grayscale d. opacity ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 321 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.11 - Apply a CSS filter NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring CSS Filters KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 70. Filter functions can be combined in a _____ to create new effects. a. comma-separated list b. semicolon-separated list c. colon-separated list Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS d. space-separated list ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 322 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.11 - Apply a CSS filter NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring CSS Filters KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 71. In a client-side image map, _____ are defined regions within an image that can be linked to different URLs. a. borders b. figure boxes c. hotspots d. drop shadows ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 324 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 72. Each hotspot within the map element is defined using the _____ element. a. header b. article c. space d. area ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

d 1 Easy HTML 324

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 73. Which of the following shape values represents the remaining area of an inline image not covered by any

hotspots? a. default b. circle c. rect d. poly ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 325 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 74. Identify the coordinate attribute for the rectangular hotspots of an image. a. coords=“x1,y1,x2,y2,…” b. coords=“0,0,width,height” c. coords=“left,top,right,bottom” d. coords=“x,y,radius” ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 325 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

75. Which of the following coordinate values is used to define polygonal hotspots for an image? a. coords=“x1,y1,x2,y2,…” b. coords=“0,0,width,height” c. coords=“left,top,right,bottom” d. coords=“x,y,radius” ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 326 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 76. Which of the following defines the default hotspot for an image? a. coords=“x1,y1,x2,y2,…” b. coords=“0,0,width,height” c. coords=“left,top,right,bottom” d. coords=“x,y,radius” ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 326 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Sam is trying to decide the best way to design the background of his web page. He would like to add background images and background styles to his design. He needs to understand how browsers load a background image and learn about Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS background style properties.

77. Sam wants the browser to load a background image and repeat the image in both the vertical and horizontal directions until the background is filled. This process is known as _____. a. painting b. tiling c. papering d. drawing ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 265 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case Based 4-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 78. Sam wants to change the position of an image on his web page. He wants to place the background image 30 pixels to the right of an element’s left edge and 30 pixels down from the top edge. Identify the correct style that Sam should use. a. background-position: 30px; b. background-position: 30px vertical; c. background-position: 30px 30px; d. background-position: t_edge, 30px; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 268 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case Based 4-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 79. Sam needs to know how to tell the browsers to scale the image in order to cover all of the background while still retaining the proportions of the image, even if that means cropping the image. The keyword Sam should use in the Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS background-size: property is _____. a. contain b. content c. cover d. auto ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 269 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case Based 4-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Scott works for an online retailer and has to format the border around each element on their web page. He has to set the border design and the border color for each element. He needs to understand how the appearance and color of the border can be defined.

80. Scott wants to use the color gray for the top and left borders and black for the right and bottom borders for an element.

Which of the following should he use to define this? a. border-color: gray black gray black; b. border-color: gray, black, gray, black; c. border-color: gray black black gray; d. border-color: gray, black, black, gray; ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 274 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case Based 4-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.03 - Add a border to an element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 81. Scott wishes to modify the combination of the borders used on an element. He wants to use a double line for the Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS top/bottom borders and a single solid line for the left/right borders. Which of the following border styles should he use? a. border-style: double solid; b. border-style: double double solid solid; c. border-style: solid double; d. border-style: double solid solid double; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 275 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.03 - Add a border to an element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Completion 82. _________ is similar to the process of filling up a floor or other surface with tiles.

ANSWER: Tiling POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 265 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 83. _________ are translucent graphics displayed behind the content of a web page with a message that the

content material is copyrighted or in draft form or some other message directed to the reader.

ANSWER: Watermarks POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy HTML 267 Completion False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 84. In the background-clip property, the _________ type is used to extend the background only through the

element content.

ANSWER:

content-box

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 268 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 85. In the background-clip property, the _________ type is used to extend the background only through the

padding space.

ANSWER:

padding-box

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 268 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 86. A _________ is a border that is based on a graphic image.

ANSWER: border image POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Moderate HTML 281

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.05 - Create a graphic border NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 87. In the background-clip property, the _________ type is used to extend the background only through the

border space.

ANSWER:

border-box

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 268 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 88. A visual impact can be given to the text on a page by using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to add a shadow

using the _________ property.

ANSWER: text-shadow POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 288 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.06 - Create a text shadow NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Drop Shadows KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 89. Apart from drop shadows, another way to modify the background color is through a _________ in which

one color gradually blends into another color or fades away if transparent colors are used.

ANSWER: color gradient Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 296 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 90. A _________ is a color gradient in which the background color transitions from a starting color to an ending

color along a straight line.

ANSWER:

linear gradient

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 296 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 91. A _________ represents the point at which a specified color ends and the transition to the next color begins.

ANSWER: color stop POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 299 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 92. A _________ is a color gradient that starts from a central point and proceeds outward in a series of Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS concentric circles or ellipses.

ANSWER: radial gradient POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 301 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 93. Whole objects that are semi-transparent can be created using the _________ property.

ANSWER: opacity POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 307 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.09 - Set the opacity of an element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Semi-Transparent Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 94. A _________ is a change that involves three spatial axes: an x-axis that runs horizontally across the page, a

y-axis that runs vertically, and a z-axis that comes straight out of the page toward and away from the viewer.

ANSWER: 3D transformation POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 316 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Transforming Page Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS 95. _________ is a measure of how rapidly objects appear to recede from a viewer in a 3D space.

ANSWER: Perspective POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 317 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Transforming Page Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 96. Perspective can be thought in terms of railroad tracks that appear to converge at a point, known as the

_________.

ANSWER:

vanishing point

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 317 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.10 - Apply a 2D and 3D transformation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Transforming Page Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 97. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) _________ adjust how a browser renders an image, a background, or a border

by modifying an object’s color, brightness, contrast, or general appearance.

ANSWER: filters POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 320 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.11 - Apply a CSS filter NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring CSS Filters KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

98. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) allows division of an image into different zones, or _________,

which can then be linked to different URLs through information provided in an image map.

ANSWER: hotspots POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 324 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 99. A _________ image map is an image map that is defined within a web page and handled entirely by a web

browser.

ANSWER:

client-side

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 324 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 100. A _________ image map relies on a program running the web server to create and administer the map.

ANSWER: server-side POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 324 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Working with Image Maps Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

101. To apply an image map to an image, the _________ attribute is added to the img element.

ANSWER: usemap POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 328 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Matching Identify the letters of the choices that best match the phrases or definitions. a. Tiling b. Vertical c. Hotspots

d. Watermarks

e. Ellipse DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

Easy HTML 265 HTML 267 HTML 296 HTML 302 HTML 324 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image 04.08 - Create linear and radial gradients 04.12 - Create an image map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying a Color Gradient Exploring Background Styles Working with Image Maps KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS 102. The default shape for a radial color gradient ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 103. Repeats the image in both vertical and horizontal directions until the entire background is filled ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 104. Linked to different URLs through information provided in an image map ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 105. The default direction for a linear color gradient ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 106. Displayed behind a content with a message that the content element is copy-righted ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 Essay 107. Explain how the position of a background image is set in a web page.

ANSWER: By default, browsers place a background image in an element’s top-left corner. One can place the background image at a different position using the following background-position property: background-position: horizontal vertical; where horizontal and vertical provide the coordinates of the image within the element background expressed using one of the CSS units of measure or as a percentage of the element’s width and height. For example, the following style places the image 10% of the width of the element from the left edge of the background and 20% of the element’s height from the background’s top edge: background-position: 10% 20%; If a single value is specified, the browser applies that value to both the horizontal and vertical position. Thus, the following style places the background image 30 pixels from the element’s left edge and 30 pixels down from the top edge: background-position: 30px; One can also place the background image using the keywords left, center, and right for the horizontal position and top, center, and bottom for the vertical position. The following style places the background image in the bottom-right corner of the element: background-position: right bottom;

POINTS:

Typically, the background-position property is only useful for non-tiled images because, if the image is tiled, the tiled image fills the background and it usually doesn't matter where the tiling starts.

1

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 267 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.02 - Add a background image NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Background Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 108. Describe the process of setting the width and color of a border.

ANSWER:

Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) supports several style properties that are used to format the border around each element. As with the margin and padding styles, one can apply a style to the top, right, bottom, or left border, or to all borders at once. To define the thickness of a specific border, use the property border-side-width: width; where side is either top, right, bottom, or left and width is the width of the border in one of the CSS units of measure. For example, the following style sets the width of the bottom border to 10 pixels: border-bottom-width: 10px; Border widths also can be expressed using the keywords thin, medium, or thick; the exact application of these keywords depends on the browser. One can define the border widths for all sides at once using the border-width property border-width: top right bottom left; where top, right, bottom, and left are the widths of the matching border. As with the margin and padding properties, if one value is entered, it’s applied to all four borders; two values set the width of the top/bottom and left/right borders, respectively; and three values are applied to the top, left/right, and bottom borders, in that order.

Thus, the following property sets the widths of the top/bottom borders to 10 pixels and the left/right borders to 20 pixels: border-width: 10px 20px; The color of each individual border is set using the property border-side-color: color; where side once again specifies the border side and color is a color name, color value, or the keyword transparent to create an invisible border. The color of the four sides can be specified using the following border-color property: border-color: top right bottom left; where top right bottom left specifies the side to which the color should be applied.

Thus, the following style uses gray for the top and left borders and black for the right and bottom borders: border-color: gray black black gray;

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS If no border color is specified, the border will use the text color assigned to the element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 273 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.03 - Add a border to an element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Borders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 109.

How are text shadows created?

ANSWER: To give visual impact to a text on a web page, one can use Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to add a shadow using the following text-shadow property: text-shadow: color offsetX offsetY blur; where color is the shadow color, offsetX and offsetY are the distances of the shadow from the text in the horizontal and vertical directions, and blur defines the amount by which the shadow spreads out, creating a blurred effect. The shadow offset values are expressed so that positive values push the shadow to the right and down while negative values move the shadow to the left and up. The default blur value is 0, creating a shadow with distinct hard edges; as the blur value increases, the edge of the shadow becomes less distinct and blends more in the text background. The following style creates a red text shadow that is 10 pixels to the right and 5 pixels down from the text with blur of 8 pixels: text-shadow: red 10px 5px 8px; Multiple shadows can be added to text by including each shadow definition in the following comma-separated list: text-shadow: shadow1, shadow2, shadow3, …; where shadow1, shadow2, shadow3, and so on are shadows applied to the text with the first shadow listed displayed on top of subsequent shadows when they overlap.

The following style rule creates two shadows with the first red shadow placed 10 pixels to the left and 5 pixels up from the text and the second gray shadow placed 3 pixels to the right and 4 pixels down from the text. Both shadows have a blur of 6 pixels: text-shadow: red -10px -5px 6px, gray 3px 4px 6px; POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy HTML 288 Essay

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 04: Graphic Design with CSS HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 04.06 - Create a text shadow NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Drop Shadows KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web True / False 1. While designing web pages for mobiles, the page content should be extensive such that the readers get the opportunity to explore all facets of the topic. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 344 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 2. While designing web pages for mobile devices, the overall file size should be kept small. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 344 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 3. Viewing a web page on a mobile device gives the same experience as viewing the same web page on a desktop computer. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 344 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4. To create a media query within a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file, the style attribute should be added to the link element in the document head. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 345 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 5. When no media attribute is used, a style sheet is assumed to apply to all devices accessing the web page. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 346 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web 6. The device-aspect-ratio feature supported by Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) and Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) gives the ratio of the device-width value to the device-height value. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 347 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 7. The media feature orientation accepts min- and max- prefixes. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 348 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 8. With responsive design, it is easier to replace styles than to add new styles. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 350 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 9. Desktop computers have two types of viewports: a visual viewport and a layout viewport. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 352 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.02 - Work with the browser viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Viewports and Device Width KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 10. A user can manually zoom into a page to make it readable within the visual viewport, but it is done at the expense of hiding content. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 352 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.02 - Work with the browser viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Viewports and Device Width KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 11. One of the key components while creating a mobile website design is to have the most important information up-front and easily accessible. a. True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 355 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Mobile Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 12. An individual cannot use only the ul.submenu:hover selector because one cannot hover over the submenu until it is visible. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 358 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Mobile Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 13. A flexbox is a box containing items whose sizes are fixed. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 374 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Introducing Flexible Boxes Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

14. Different items within a flexbox can have different growth rates. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 15. Order values for flexboxes cannot be negative. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 389 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Reordering Page Content with Flexboxes KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 16. The align-items property is only impactful when there are multiple lines of flex items. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 393 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.07 - Explore flexbox layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Exploring Flexbox Layouts Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

17. The default style of browsers to format the print versions of the web pages they encounter always result in the best printouts. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 403 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.08 - Create a print style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Printed Media KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 18. The styles applied to a page box using the @page rule are limited to defining the page size and the page margin. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 405 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.09 - Work with page sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 19. By default, the @page rule is applied only to the first page of the printed output. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 406 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.09 - Work with page sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 20. A page name should be created to define styles for the first, left, and right pages. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 406 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.09 - Work with page sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Modified True / False 21. In the context of designing websites for mobile devices, to give a comfortable page layout user experience, the content should be laid out within a single column with no vertical scrolling.

ANSWER: False - horizontal POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 344 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web 22. The tty media type is used for television-type devices with low resolution, color, and limited scrollability.

ANSWER: False - tv POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 346 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 23. The most appropriate sizing unit for television devices is the use of points.

ANSWER: False - print, printing POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 346 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 24. The @media and @import rules employ similar syntax.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 347 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web 25. Widths in media queries are based on the width of the visual viewport.

ANSWER: False - layout POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 352 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.02 - Work with the browser viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Viewports and Device Width KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 26. When the hover event is used to hide an object or display it, mobile browsers employ a double-tap event in which the first tap activates any hypertext links associated with a page object.

ANSWER: False - second POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 359 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Mobile Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 27. An important aspect of mobile design is optimizing a site's performance under static network conditions.

ANSWER: False - varying POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 361 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web 28. By default, flexbox items are arranged vertically.

ANSWER: False - horizontally POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 375 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Flexible Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 29. The growth value of flex items defines the initial size of an item before a browser attempts to fit it to the flexbox.

ANSWER: False - basis size POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 377 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.06 - Work with flex sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Flex Items KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 30. If a flexbox doesn't wrap to a new line as it is resized, then the flex items will continue to shrink, still sharing the same row or column.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 380 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.06 - Work with flex sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Flex Items KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web 31. A flex item cannot itself be a flexbox for its child elements.

ANSWER: False - can POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 385 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.07 - Explore flexbox layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Flex Items KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 32. Both the align-content and align-items properties have a default value of center.

ANSWER: False - stretch POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 393 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.07 - Explore flexbox layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Flexbox Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 33. When a user hovers or touches a navicon, the navigation menu is revealed.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 394 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Navicon Menu KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 34. In the context of the application of the word-wrap property to a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) text, a value of Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web break-word to the type attribute breaks a text string only at common break points.

ANSWER: False - normal POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 412 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.09 - Work with page sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 35. When a document is sent to a printer, a browser determines the location of page breaks unless that information is included as part of the print style sheet.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 415 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.10 - Add and remove page breaks NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Page Breaks KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Multiple Choice 36. While designing websites for mobile devices, _____ colors should be used so that pages are easily visible in outdoor lighting. a. contrasting b. red and blue c. darker d. lighter ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 344 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 37. According to Ethan Marcotte's responsive design theory, _____ is a primary component that ensures that the page layout of websites automatically adjusts to screens of different widths. a. contrasting colors b. responsive images c. flexible layout d. media queries ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 345 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 38. _____ are used to associate a style sheet or style rule with a specific device or list of device features. a. Flexible layouts b. Responsive images c. Viewports d. Media queries ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 345 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:41 AM

39. Identify the link element that accesses a style sheet file named output.css only when the device is a printer or a projection device. a. <*link href="output.css" media="print&&projection" /> b. <link *href="&output.css" media="print, projection" /> c. <link href="output.css" media="print, projection" /> d. <link href="output.css" media="*print, *projection" /> ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 346 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 40. The _____ is a possible media type value for the media attribute. a. flexi b. embossed c. lnk d. view ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 346 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 41. The _____ media type value for the media attribute is used for paged Braille printers. a. braille b. embossed c. handheld Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web d. screen ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 346 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Moderate DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 42. Identify the media rule that must be included in a Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) file so that media queries can be used to associate specific style rules with specific devices. a. #media devices { style rules } b. &media devices { style rules } c. @media devices { style rules } d. *media devices { style rules } ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 346 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

43. Identify the Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) rule that imports a file named screen.css only when a screen or projection device is being used. a. @import url("screen.css") screen, projection; b. #import url("screen.css") screen, projection; c. @import url("screen.css") screen&&projection; d. @import url("screen.css") *screen, *projection; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 347 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 44. To target a device based on its features, identify the syntax used to add a feature and its value to the media attribute. a. @media="devices and|or (feature:value)" b. media="devices and|or (feature:value)" c. media="devices and&&or (feature:value)" d. media="devices and|or (*feature:value)" ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 347 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 45. The _____ is a device feature that gives the ratio of the width of the display area to its height. a. index-ratio Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web b. display-ratio c. aspect-ratio d. orientation-ratio ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 347 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 46. Identify the media query that applies style rules only to screens that are at least 300 pixels wide. a. @media screen and (min-width: 300px) { style rules } b. media screen and (@min-width: 300px) { style rules } c. media screen and (least-width: 300px) { style rules } d. @media screen and (@minwidth: 300px) { style rules } ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 348 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 47. Multiple media features can be combined using _____. a. real-time operators Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web b. logical operators c. relational operators d. dimensional operators ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 348 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 48. Identify the query that matches any screen device that also supports color. a. @media screen and color { style rules } b. media (@screen) and (@color) { style rules } c. @media screen and @(color) { style rules } d. @media screen and (color) { style rules } ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 348 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 49. For older browsers that do not support media queries, Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) 3 provides the _____ keyword to hide style sheets from those browsers.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web a. initial b. none c. only d. auto ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 348 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 50. Web pages are seen within a window called the _____. a. wireframe b. navigator c. prototype d. viewport ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 352 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.02 - Work with the browser viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Viewports and Device Width KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 51. Mobile devices have a _____ containing the entire content of the page, some of which may be hidden from a user. a. layout viewport b. navigating viewport c. wireframe viewport d. contextual viewport ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 352 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.02 - Work with the browser viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Viewports and Device Width KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 52. The problem wherein the user needs to scroll vertically down the web page to view information on a mobile device can be resolved by using _____. a. pulldown menus b. navigation viewports c. horizontal wireframes d. contextual data ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 355 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Mobile Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 53. Identify the selector that should be used to let a submenu remain visible even when the pointer moves away from the title and hovers over the non-visible submenu. a. a.submenuTitle:hover+ul.submenu, hover: ul.submenu b. a.submenuTitle:hover+ul.submenu, ul.submenu:hover c. a.submenuTitle:hover+ul.submenu, *ul.submenu:&hover d. a.submenuTitle:hover+ul.submenu, ul.submenu:@hover ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 357 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating a Mobile Design Bloom's: Understand 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

54. A mobile browser will interpret a _____ event as a tap event in which a user taps a page object. a. block b. compilation c. selection d. hover ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 359 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Mobile Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 55. When a hover event is used to hide an object or display it, mobile browsers employ a _____ event. a. double-tap b. compilation c. selection d. highlight-text ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 359 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Mobile Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 56. When a hover event is used to hide an object or display it, mobile browsers employ a double-tap event in which the Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web _____ displays the page object. a. first tap b. second tap c. title toolbar d. texting event ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 359 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Mobile Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 57. An alternative to direct testing of mobile interfaces on all mobile devices is the use of _____. a. mobile device spurs b. mobile device synchronizers c. mobile device emulators d. mobile device initiators ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 359 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Mobile Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 58. While creating a website for tablet design, to display the submenus horizontally rather than vertically, a style rule needs to be added to the tablet media query to _____. a. display the submenus one after the other b. float the submenus side-by-side c. reduce the width of the submenu display bars d. partially overlap the submenu titles ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 363 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Tablet Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 59. To make the submenus in a tablet device overlay the page content, the submenus should be placed with _____. a. relative positioning b. z-index positioning c. incremental positioning d. absolute positioning ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 365 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Tablet Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 60. While creating a website for tablet design, to keep the submenus in their current position on a page, one needs to make each main list item a container for its submenu by setting its position property to _____. a. relative b. actual c. logical d. absolute ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

a 1 Easy HTML 365 Multiple Choice False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Tablet Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 61. When submenus overlay page content, a(n) _____ should be added so that when a submenu is opened, it will stand out more from the page content. a. relative element b. drop shadow c. logical tag d. absolute position ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 365 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 62. _____ can be used to have a single specification that automatically adapts itself to the screen width without requiring a new layout design. a. Flexible boxes b. Drop shadows c. Logical tags d. Absolute positioning ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 374 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Flexible Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:41 AM

63. Items within a flexbox are laid out along a _____, which can point in either the horizontal or vertical direction. a. void axis b. main axis c. sub axis d. cross axis ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 374 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Flexible Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 64. In the context of a flexible box, perpendicular to the main axis is the _____, which is used to define the height or width of each item. a. flow axis b. logic axis c. void axis d. cross axis ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 374 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Flexible Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 65. Identify the flex-direction property that is used to change the orientation of a flexbox. a. flex-direction: orient_direction; b. flex-direction: direction; c. @flex-direction: direction; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web d. flex-direction: *direction; ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 375 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Flexible Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 66. If flex items are unable to fit within a single line, identify the flex-wrap property used to wrap those items to a new line. a. flex-wrap: type<flexbox>; b. flex-wrap: @type; c. @flex-wrap: type; d. flex-wrap: type; ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 375 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Flexible Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 67. Identify the correct flex-flow style that combines both the flex-direction and flex-wrap properties. a. flex-flow: direction wrap; b. flex-flow: direction||wrap; c. flex-flow: direction&&wrap; d. flex-flow: flex-direction, flex-wrap; ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

a 1 Moderate HTML 375

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Flexible Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 68. Identify the default flex value that spontaneously sets the size of a flex item to match its content or the value of its width and height property. a. flex: 0 1 initial; b. flex: 0 1 none; c. flex: 0 1 inherit; d. flex: 0 1 auto; ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 381 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.06 - Work with flex sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Flex Items KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 69. In Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) every printed page is defined as a _____. a. boxed element b. boxed schema c. page schema d. page box ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 405 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.09 - Work with page sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

70. A page box is composed of a _____, which contains the content of a document. a. page element b. page schema c. page area d. page layout ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 405 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.09 - Work with page sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 71. Identify the page rule using which styles are applied to a page box. a. #page { style rules } b. @page { style rules } c. *page { style rules } d. <page> { style rules } ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 405 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.09 - Work with page sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

72. Identify the correct format to set the size of a page margin to 0.5 inches. a. @page { *margin: 0.5in } b. @page { margin: 0.5in; } c. @page { <margin>: 0.5in; } d. @page { margin: (0.5in); } ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 405 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.09 - Work with page sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 73. Identify the format for manually inserting a page break directly before an element. a. before(page-break): type; b. page-break-before: type; c. <page-break/>before: type; d. page-break: *before-type; ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

b 1 Easy HTML 415 Multiple Choice False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.10 - Add and remove page breaks NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Page Breaks KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 74. For each h1 heading to start on a new page, identify the style rule that should be used to insert a page break before each heading. a. h1 { page-break-before: always; } b. h1 { page-break-before: auto; } c. h1 { page-break-before: inherit; } d. h1 { page-break-before: content; } ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 415 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.10 - Add and remove page breaks NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Page Breaks KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 75. A page break can be prevented from being added before or after a heading by using the keyword _____ in the pagebreak-before or page-break-after properties. a. hide b. stop c. avoid d. block ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

c 1 Easy HTML 416

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.10 - Add and remove page breaks NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Page Breaks KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 76. Identify the page-break-inside property that prevents printers from inserting a page break. a. page-break-inside: always; b. page-break-inside: type; c. page-break-insert: avoid; d. page-break-insert: type; ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 417 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.10 - Add and remove page breaks NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Page Breaks KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 77. Page breaks within block elements can often leave behind _____, which is a fragment of text left dangling at the top of page. a. lags b. orphans c. widows d. gaps ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 418 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.10 - Add and remove page breaks NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Page Breaks Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

78. Page breaks within block elements can often leave behind _____, which is a text fragment left at the bottom of a page. a. lags b. orphans c. windows d. gaps ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 418 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.10 - Add and remove page breaks NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Page Breaks KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 5-1 Alex, a web designer, is assigned the task of creating a mobile-device-friendly website for a leading fashion outlet called AllStyles. A desktop version of AllStyles's website already exists. Alex can refer to this desktop version of the website to create the mobile website design.

79. The desktop version of the website contains a long list of hyperlinks and this can obstruct the view of the main content when viewed from a mobile device. Which of the following should Alex use to hide this long list of hypertext links so that it appears only in response to a tap of a major heading in the navigation list? a. Pop-up links b. Header links c. Navigator menus d. Pulldown menus ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 355 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 5-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating a Mobile Design Bloom's: Apply 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

80. For the AllStyles's main web page, Alex creates a navigation bar that includes topical areas named Clothing, Accessories, and About Us. Alex wants to create nested lists within each of these topical areas that would contain links to specific pages on the AllStyles website. In order to do so, Alex must _____ while writing the HTML code. a. set the width of the layout viewport to the width of the nested lists b. put each of the nested lists within a class c. insert the structure of the nested list within a specific style sheet structure d. use the only keyword to hide the list items ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 356 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 5-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Mobile Design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 81. Alex has placed each of the nested lists within a class called submenu. He wants to display a nested submenu only when the user hovers the mouse pointer over its associated submenu title. Which of the following selector formats should be used by Alex to select the submenu that is immediately preceded by a hovered submenu title? a. *submenuTitle:hover+<ul>submenu b. submenuTitle:@hover+ul.submenu c. a.submenuTitle:hover+ul.submenu d. a.submenuTitle: ul.submenu+hover ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 357 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 5-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Creating a Mobile Design Bloom's: Apply 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 5-2 Lara is the chief editor of "Laughter and Life," an online magazine. Lara has assigned Jenny the task of redesigning the magazine's website. Lara has supplied Jenny with all the necessary documents and images that are essential to enhance the look of the website. Lara's requirements necessitate the use of flexboxes to redesign the website.

82. To reduce the cluttered look of the web page, Jenny needs to separate the page content from page design. Which of the following properties must Jenny use to place the flex items in a desired order? a. align: value; b. order: value; c. justify: value; d. content: value; ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 388 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 5-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Reordering Page Content with Flexboxes KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 83. Jenny needs to change the existing layout where the flex items are laid down at the start of the main axis. Which of the following properties should Jenny use to specify a different placement for the flex items? a. align-content b. order-content c. justify-content d. organize-content ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

c 1 Challenging HTML 390 Multiple Choice

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 5-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.07 - Explore flexbox layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Flexbox Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 84. Jenny wants to distribute the flex items in the magazine’s website evenly with the first and last items aligned with the start and end of the main axis. Identify the keyword Jenny must assign to value in the align-content: value; property. a. space-between b. space-around c. space-under d. space-above ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 391 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 5-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.07 - Explore flexbox layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Flexbox Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Completion 85. _________ images, a primary component of responsive design theory, rescale based on the size of a viewing device.

ANSWER: Responsive POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 345 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

86. The _________ media type is used for fixed-width devices such as teletype machines and terminals. tty ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 346 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 87. Media devices can be specified when importing one style sheet into another by adding the media type to the _________ rule. @import ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 347 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 88. The _________ operator negates any feature found in an expression. not ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 348 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

89. Mobile devices have a _________ viewport that displays a web page content that fits within a mobile screen.

ANSWER: visual POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 352 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.02 - Work with the browser viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Viewports and Device Width KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 90. While creating a website for tablet design, objects placed with _________ positioning are removed from the document flow.

ANSWER: absolute POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 365 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.04 - Create a pulldown menu with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Tablet Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 91. A(n) _________ is a box containing items whose sizes can shrink or grow to match the boundaries of the box.

ANSWER: flexible box flexbox POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 374 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Flexible Boxes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

92. In flex-wrap: type;, the type should be _________ to wrap flex items to a new line starting in the opposite direction from the current line. wrap-reverse ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 375 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.05 - Create a flexbox NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Flexible Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 93. A common technique for mobile websites is to hide navigation menus but to indicate their presence with a(n) _________, which is a symbol usually represented as three horizontal lines.

ANSWER: navicon POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 394 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Navicon menu KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 94. To apply a print style sheet, one must use the _________ attribute with the link elements to target style sheets to either screen devices or print devices. media ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 403 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.08 - Create a print style sheet Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Designing for Printed Media Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

95. A page box is composed of the _________, which contains the space between the printed content and the edges of the page.

ANSWER: margin area POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 405 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.09 - Work with page sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 96. Once a page name is defined, the content of an element will appear on its own page, with the browser automatically inserting _________ before and after the element if required.

ANSWER: page breaks POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 406 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.08 - Create a print style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 97. Since a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) has no common break points such as blank spaces, applying the _________ option ensures that the text string of the URL will be kept to a manageable length by breaking it as needed to fit within the page layout.

ANSWER: break-word POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 412 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.08 - Create a print style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Matching Identify the letters of the choices that best match the phrases or definitions. a. not b. justify-content c. Software development kit d. Mobile interface e. Links f. align-content g. Media queries h. basis size i. Print style sheet j. color-index k. none l. Handheld DIFFICULTY: Easy Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 344 HTML 345 HTML 346 HTML 347 HTML 348 HTML 359 HTML 377 HTML 381 HTML 391 HTML 402 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.01 - Create a media query 05.03 - Apply a responsive design 05.06 - Work with flex sizes 05.07 - Explore flexbox layouts 05.08 - Create a print style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Media Queries Introducing Responsive Design Working with Flex Items Exploring Flexbox Layouts Designing for Printed Media KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember | Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web 98. While designing websites for mobile devices, these need to be easily accessed via a touch interface.

ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 99. This determines the properties of the device rendering a website page so that appropriate designs can be delivered to specific devices.

ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 100. This media type is used for mobile devices with small screens and limited bandwidth.

ANSWER: l POINTS: 1 101. The number of colors supported by an output device.

ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 102. This operator negates any features found in an expression.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 103. This property has no impact when items are flexed to fill the entire given space.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 104. The best way to test this is to view it directly on a mobile device.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 105. This is provided by mobile phone companies for developers to use to test their programs and websites.

ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 106. It defines the initial size of a flex item before a browser attempts to fit it to a flexbox.

ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 107. It is used to create an inflexible item that will not grow or shrink.

ANSWER: k POINTS: 1 108. It arranges multiple lines of content along a flexbox's cross axis.

ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web 109. It formats the printed version of a web document.

ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 Essay 110. Explain viewports and device width. Also, discuss setting widths in media queries.

ANSWER: Web pages are viewed within a window called the viewport. Mobile devices have two types of viewports: a visual viewport displaying the web page content that fits within a mobile screen and a layout viewport containing the entire content of the page, some of which may be hidden from the user. The two viewports exist in order to accommodate websites that have been written with desktop computers in mind. A mobile device will automatically zoom out of the page in order to give users the complete view of the page's content, but this often results in a view that is too small to be usable. While the user can manually zoom into the page to make it readable within the visual viewport, this is done at the expense of hiding content.

Widths in media queries are based on the width of the layout viewport, not the visual viewport. In order to correctly base a media query on the physical width of the device, one has to tell the browser that the width of the layout viewport should match the device width.

This can be done by adding the following meta element to the HTML file: <meta name="viewport" content="properties" /> where properties is a comma-separated list of viewport properties and their values.

For example: <meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1" /> In this meta element, the device-width keyword is used to set the width of the layout viewport to the physical width of the device's screen.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 352–353 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.02 - Work with the browser viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Viewports and Device Width KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Comprehension DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 111. Describe the process of testing a mobile website.

ANSWER: The best way to test a mobile interface is to view it directly on a mobile device. However, given the large number of mobile devices and device versions, it’s usually not practical to do direct testing on all devices. An alternative to having the physical device is to emulate it through a software program or an online testing service. Almost every mobile phone company provides a software development kit or SDK that developers can use to test their programs and websites.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web Android SDK, iOS SDK, Mobile Phone Emulator, Mobile Test Me, MobiOne Studio, Opera Mobile SDK, and Windows Phone SDK are some of the popular device emulators.

Browsers are also starting to include device emulators as part of their developer tools.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 367 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.03 - Apply a responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Mobile Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Comprehension DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM 112. Briefly explain the procedure followed for setting the page size.

ANSWER: As printed media can vary in size and orientation, the following size property allows web authors to define the dimensions of a printed page: size: width height; where width and height are the width and height of the page. Thus, to define a page that is 8.5 inches wide by 11 inches tall with a 1-inch margin, one should apply the following style rule: @page { size: 8.5in 11in; margin: 11n; }

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

Once can replace the width and height values with the keyword auto (to let browsers determine the page dimensions) or inherit (to inherit the page size from the parent element). If a page does not fit into the dimensions specified in the @page rule, browsers will either rotate the page or rescale it to fit within the defined page size.

1 Moderate HTML 405 Essay

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 05: Designing for the Mobile Web HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 05.09 - Work with page sizes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the @page Rule KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Comprehension DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:41 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns True / False 1. A web table contains multiple table rows with each row consisting of one or more table cells. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 436 2. Header cells and data cells are types of table cells supported by web tables. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 438 3. A table has one row with four cells and another row with five. After mapping the cells, the table will have

five columns. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 442 4. The style rule border-spacing: 10px; specifies that all borders within a table should be separated by a

distance of 10 pixels. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 444 5. Spanning cells are created by adding div attributes to either td or th element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False REFERENCES: HTML 447 6. Only one caption is allowed per web table. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 453 7. A web table can contain any number of thead and tfoot elements but only one tbody element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns REFERENCES: HTML 460 8. Columns and column groups accept only CSS style properties to modify the column borders, background,

width, and visibility. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 465 9. The style rules applied to an entire web table are the ones with the lowest precedence. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 468 10. While treating an entire definition list as a table, the div elements act as table rows and both the definition

term <dt> and the descriptions <dd> act as table cells within that row. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 473 11. The style rule columns: 250px 4; creates a layout of 4 columns with a minimum width of 250 pixels

each. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 481 12. In column-span: span; property, span is either none to prevent spanning or all to enable the

content to span across all of the columns. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 485 Modified True / False 13. A web table is an effective tool for organizing and classifying web page content.

ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 436 14. A class attribute can be included by placing a table in the schedule class to distinguish it from other tables

that may exist on a website.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 437 15. The th element is used to mark the data cells.

ANSWER: False - header cells REFERENCES: HTML 438 16. The default browser style for data cells is to display text as unformatted text and left-aligned within the cell.

ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 439 17. HTML supports three row groups, which define rows that belong to the table head, table border, or table

body.

ANSWER:

False - table footer REFERENCES: HTML 460 18. When a span attribute is not included, the col element references a single column.

ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 464 19. Once columns are defined using the colgroup and col elements, individual columns can be identified

using id and class attributes to apply CSS styles to specific columns.

ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 464 20. For widows property widows: value; value is the minimum number of lines stranded before a column

break.

ANSWER:

False - after a column break REFERENCES: HTML 484 Multiple Choice 21. Which of the following HTML structures arranges text in multiple rows and columns? a. <div> b. <table> c. <span> d. <nav> ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 436 22. Which of the following HTML elements is used to add a row in a table? a. <td> b. <tr> c. <dd> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns d. <tl> ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 436 23. Identify the correct hierarchy of tags to create a web table. a. <table>, <tr>, <td> </td>, </tr>, </table> b. <table>, <td>, <tr> </td>,</tr> </table> c. <tr>, <table>, <td> </td>,</table>, </tr> d. <tr>, <td>, <table>,</table>,</tr>,</td> ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 436 24. Which of the following is true of class in the table tag <table class=” ”>? a. class is an attribute. b. class is an tag. c. class is an function. d. class is an label.

ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 438 25. Which of the following HTML elements is used to create header cells in a web table? a. <tr> b. <td> c. <th> d. <head> ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 438 26. The two types of table cells supported by web tables are _____. a. row cells and column cells b. header cells and data cells c. border cells and caption cells d. legend cells and web cells ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 438 27. The default browser style for header cells is to display the text of the header in bold font and _____ within

the cell. a. left-aligned b. right-aligned c. centered horizontally Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns d. positioned vertically ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 438 28. Data cells that do not function as headers for table rows or columns are marked using the _____ element. a. td b. th c. tt d. tr ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 439

29. In the given figure, the items marked Box A and Box B are the _____ respectively. a. row cells and column cells b. header cells and data cells c. header cells and row cells d. data cells and column cells ANSWER: d REFERENCES: HTML 441 30. When two adjacent 1-pixel-wide borders are collapsed together, the width of the resulting border is _____. a. 2-pixels b. 1-pixels c. 4-pixels d. 0.5-pixel ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 444

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns

31. The given figure is an example of the _____ borders model. a. collapsed b. separate c. inherit d. initial ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 444 32. Which of the following is a default value for border-collapse property? a. border-collapse: separate; b. border-collapse: collapse; c. border-collapse: inherit; d. border-collapse: initial; ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 444 33. Which of the following statements is true of adding adjacent borders, to a table, using CSS? a. A border style of none is overridden by the same border style. b. A narrow border takes priority over a wider border if neither is hidden. c. The border style with the highest priority is used if the two borders have the same width but different

styles. d. The color of the element in the table with the lower priority takes precedence, if the borders differ only in color.

ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 444 34. _____ is a single cell that occupies more than one cell row and/or column. a. Data cell b. Header cell c. Table cell d. Spanning cell ANSWER: d REFERENCES: HTML 447 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns 35. Which of the following HTML attributes is used to create a single cell that occupies more than one cell from

a series of horizontal cells? a. rowwidth b. colspan c. rowspan d. colwidth ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 447 36. A table contains five columns where one of the cells in a row spans three columns. Identify the number of

table cells that will exist in that row. a. Five b. Four c. Three d. Six ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 447 37. The _____ attribute is added to a <td> element to create a cell that spreads across several cells vertically. a. cellspacing b. cellpadding c. colspan d. rowspan ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 447

38. In the given figure, Box A refers to _____. a. the second cell in column two that spans across two rows b. the second cell in rows two and three that spans seven columns c. the second cell in row one that spans seven columns d. the second cell in rows two and three that spans two columns ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 448 39. What is the purpose of colspan in <td colspan=”7”>? a. It sets each cell to span seven rows within its column. b. It sets each cell to span seven columns within its row.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns c. It sets each cell to span the eighth column within its row into equal parts. d. It sets each cell to span the eighth row within its column into equal parts.

ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 448 40. Which of the following HTML tags is used to set the width of a table border? a. <table border=”value”> b. </table width=”value”> c. </table border=”value”> d. <table width=”value”> ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 453 41. Which of the following HTML elements is used to create a table title? a. <table> b. <caption> c. <style> d. <span> ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 453 42. By default, a browser places a table caption _____. a. below the table b. in the first row of the table c. above the table d. in the first cell of the table ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 454 43. Identify a CSS property to place a table caption. a. caption-side: position; b. caption-width: position; c. caption-align: position; d. caption-fit: position; ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 454 44. Which of the following CSS properties is used to align the caption text horizontally? a. text-align b. caption-position c. caption-align Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns d. text-side ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 454 45. When a style for a table element is created by setting the font color to red, _____. a. the caption text will be displayed in a red font b. the caption text will be displayed in black font c. the caption text will be displayed in the same color as the previous table d. the caption text will be displayed in the same color as the border ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 455 46. Identify the three row groups supported by HTML. a. thead, tfoot, and tborder b. thead, tbody, and tfoot c. thead, tborder, and tbody d. thead, tfoot, and tcell ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 460 47. Which of the following statements is true of row groups? a. The rows are determined based on the total number of cells within a table. b. The individual rows are determined using only the class attribute. c. The row groups are used to create different styles for groups of rows in a table. d. The row groups are used in different applications where the table content is only from internal data

sources.

ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 462 48. Which of the following is true of row groups that are defined in an HTML table? a. The thead element must appear first, followed by the tbody element, and finally the tfoot

element. b. A table can contain only one thead and tfoot element but can have numerous tbody elements. c. A table can contain only one tbody element which is added between thead and tfoot element. d. The tbody appears before tfoot to allow the browser to render the body before receiving numerous of tfoot rows.

ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 460

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns

49. In the given figure, identify the row group element Box A. a. tbody b. tfoot c. thead d. tcell ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 463 50. Identify a true statement to determine the number of columns in a web table. a. The number of columns is equal to number of caption elements. b. The number of columns is equal to number of rows in a web table. c. The number of columns is the number of cells within the table rows. d. The number of columns is the total number of cells in a web table.

ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 464 51. The columns within the colgroup element are identified by the _____ element. a. <span column=”value”/> b. <colspan=”value”/> c. <col-span=”type”/> d. <spancol=”type”/> ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 464 52. Consider the following code.

<colgroup> <col span=”2” class=”Frstcols”/> <col id=”Lastcol”/> <colgroup> How many columns does the <colgroup> element create? a. Two b. One Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns c. Four d. Three ANSWER: d REFERENCES: HTML 464 53. Which of the following table objects has the highest precedence in terms of style? a. Table cells b. Rows c. Columns d. Table ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 467 54. When the width of an entire table is set to be larger than the width required for individual columns, the extra

space is _____. a. added to the first column of the table b. divided equally among the columns c. added to the last column of the table d. filled out as a border of the table ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 468 55. Which of the following is an equivalent HTML element for display: table-cell; style? a. <th> b. <table> c. <col> d. <tr> ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 472 56. Identify the first step to create a responsive web table that relies only on CSS. a. Change the table layout so that each table object is rendered as a block element. b. Add a text of data labels as attributes of all of the td elements in the table body. c. Use relative positioning to place each data cell with a large left padding to insert data label text. d. Add the content of the data label attribute before the data cell value.

ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 476 57. To insert the information of the data-label attribute directly before the data cell value, the _____

property is used. a. content b. position Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns c. padding d. display ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 476 58. Identify a style property that creates a column size of 200-pixels. a. column-count b. column-control c. column-width d. column-gap ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 481 59. Identify a property that is used to separate one column from the next using graphic dividing line. a. column-rule b. column-count c. column-width d. column-gap ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 482 60. Which of the following styles sets the column breaks within paragraphs to leave a minimum of two and

three lines at the top and bottom of each column respectively? a. article p { break-before: always; } b. article p { break-before: always; } c.

d.

article p { orphans: 3; widows: 2; } article p { break-inside: auto; }

ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 484 61. Which of the following properties prevents the spanning of content across all the columns? a. column-span: all; b. column-span: none; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns c. column-span: initial; d. column-span: inherit; ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 485

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 6.1 Andy designed a web page for a product-oriented industry using CSS properties. He used several HTML tags to create the web page. He also used tables to ensure that the data is easily managed.

62. Andy has created a table for product details where the names of the products and prices of the products are

the headers of the table. Which of the following style rules should he add to place a border of 10-pixels around the table with a white background? a. table.product {background: white; border: 10px; width: 100%;} b. table.product {border: 10px, white; width: 100%;} c. table.product {background: white, 10px; width: 100%;} d. table.product {border: white; width: 100%;} ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 442 63. Andy wants the borders to be distinctly visible for each cell in the product details table. Which of the

following properties must Andy add to his code to accomplish his goal? a. border-spacing: length; b. border-collapse: separate; c. border-collapse: collapse; d. border-spacing: initial; ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 444 64. Which of the following properties must Andy use to set the gap between the borders created by using the

border-collapse property? a. border-spacing: value; b. border-spacing: value; c. border: length; d. border: width; ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 446

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 6.2 Luis has created a web page for a textile industry. When viewing the web page on a different computer, Luis Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns notices a difference in the web page layout. So he decided to make changes in the code to make the layout suitable on all computers.

65. Which of the following properties helps Luis in making the content on the web page more readable by

spreading the content into a specific number of columns on a single page? a. column-span; b. column-count; c. column-collapse; d. column-control; ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 478 66. Luis has created a table to include the definitions of manufacturing tools used in the industry. He wants to

add a space between each column cell of the definition for better understanding. Identify a property that Luis should include in the code to fulfill the requirement. a. column-gap; b. column-align c. column-count; d. column-space; ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 481 Completion 67. In _________ borders model, borders from adjacent elements are merged together to form a single border in

a new style that combines features of both the borders.

ANSWER: collapsed REFERENCES: HTML 444 68. When a cell _________ multiple rows or columns, it pushes other cells to the right or down in a table.

ANSWER: spans REFERENCES: HTML 447 69. Only one caption is allowed per web table, and the caption element must be listed directly after the opening

_________ tag.

ANSWER:

<table>

REFERENCES: HTML 453 70. In HTML, to specify the caption location for a web table the _________ property is used. caption-side ANSWER: REFERENCES: HTML 454 71. When creating row groups, the table _________ group appears after the table footer group to allow browsers

to render the footer before receiving numerous groups of table body rows.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns ANSWER: body REFERENCES: HTML 460 72. Any style that is applied to the thead, tbody, or tfoot element is _________ by the rows those

elements contain.

ANSWER: inherited REFERENCES: HTML 462 73. The _________ property value of fixed tells the browser to ignore cell content when reducing the width of

the table columns. table-layout ANSWER: REFERENCES: HTML 469 74. Using the CSS _________ property, a table layout is applied to other HTML elements such as paragraphs,

block quotes, or list. display ANSWER: REFERENCES: HTML 472 75. In HTML5, _________ is an attribute that stores the data labels or customized data.

ANSWER: data attribute REFERENCES: HTML 476 76. _________ are the layouts in which content is displayed side-by-side in a page and differs from those

layouts that use floating elements or flexboxes.

ANSWER: Column layouts REFERENCES: HTML 478 Essay 77. Write an HTML code to create a table with three rows and two columns. Add appropriate headers and enter

the data into the table. <table border="1"> ANSWER: <tr> <th>Name</th> <th>Roll No</th> </tr> <tr> <td>Andy</td> <td>34</td> </tr> <tr> <td>Anish</td> <td>35</td> </tr> </table> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns REFERENCES: HTML 436–440 78. Explain table row group elements and the order that should be maintained when writing an HTML code.

ANSWER:

HTML supports three row group elements, which define rows that belong to the table head, table footer, or table body. They are marked using the thead, tfoot, and tbody elements.

The order of these elements while entering them in the HTML code is important.

The thead element must appear first, followed by the tfoot element (if it exists), and finally the tbody element. A table can contain one thead and one tfoot element, but it can include any number of tbody elements to mark row groups that contain several topical sections.

REFERENCES: HTML 460 79. What are the CSS properties that are used to manage column breaks?

ANSWER: The placement of column breaks can be controlled through several CSS properties.

The size of column orphans (a line of text stranded at the bottom of a column) can be controlled using the following orphansproperty, orphans: value; where value is the minimum number of lines stranded before a column break. Similarly, to control the size of column widows (a line of text placed at the top of a column), the following widows property is used, widows: value; where value is the minimum number of lines placed after the column break.

Another way to define a column break is to use the properties break-before: type; break-after: type; where type can be either auto (to allow the browser to automatically set the column break) or always (to always place a break).

REFERENCES: HTML 484 Matching

Identify the letters of the choices that best match the phrases or definitions. a. widows property b. Header cell c. td element d. Separate borders model Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 06: Working with Tables and Columns e. Spanning cells

f. Table footer row group

g. vertical-align property

h. Data attributes

i. Responsive table design

j. Column width

REFERENCES: HTML 441 HTML 439 HTML 484 HTML 445 HTML 461 HTML 470 HTML 476 HTML 447 HTML 481 80. It is used to mark table cell content that is not the head of a row or column.

ANSWER: c 81. It a line of text placed at the top of a column.

ANSWER: a 82. The boundary around the entire table is hidden but a 1-pixel blue boundary is assigned to the cells within the

table.

ANSWER: d 83. It appears before the table body group.

ANSWER: f 84. They are often used for database applications that read the contents of HTML files.

ANSWER: h 85. It is used to move the cell text in a table.

ANSWER: g 86. They are created by adding the rowspan and colspan attributes to either td or th elements.

ANSWER: e 87. It is placed at the start of each row to identify the row content.

ANSWER: b 88. The table features are hidden as it does not use the table header or footer.

ANSWER: i 89. It acts like the basis value for items in a flexbox.

ANSWER: j

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form True / False 1. The most common way of accepting user input is through a web form. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 502 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.01 - Explore web forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 2. Once the field values have been entered by the user, they are processed by a program running on the user’s computer or on a web server in a secure location. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 503 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.02 - Work with form servers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 3. A form element must be placed only within the header tag of a web page. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 504 QUESTION TYPE: True / False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Starting a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4. By default, legends are placed in the top-right corner of the field set box. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 508 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Field Set KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 5. For url type data, the virtual keyboard includes a key that inserts the .com character string. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 514 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Input Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 6. When for attribute is used, the label text can be placed anywhere within the page and it will still be associated with the control. a. True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 515 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Field Labels KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 7. There are predefined CSS styles to format the appearance of a placeholder. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 525 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.05 - Explore form layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Defining Default Values and Placeholders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 8. The second option in a selection list is selected by default and therefore contains the field’s default value. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 532 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.07 - Create a selection list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Selection List Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

9. A default value need not be specified; the text area box can be left empty or the placeholder attribute can be used to provide a hint to users about what to enter into the text box. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 542 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.09 - Create check boxes and text area boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Text Area Box KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 10. The appearance of a command, submit, and reset button is determined by the browser. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 559 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.12 - Create form buttons NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Form Buttons KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Modified True / False 11. Option buttons are also called selection lists as they select data values from a more extensive list of options.

ANSWER: False - radio buttons POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form REFERENCES: HTML 502 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.01 - Explore web forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 12. In a form element, attributes specify how the form should be processed by the browser.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 504 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.03 - Create forms and field sets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Starting a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 13. The post method is the default method that tells the browser to append the form data to the end of the URL specified in the action attribute.

ANSWER: False - get method POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 505 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.03 - Create forms and field sets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Starting a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 14. The id attribute is required only when it is needed to reference the control element.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 510 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Input Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 15. There is no need to include a for attribute within a label element while nesting a control, if the association is made implicitly.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 515 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Field Labels KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 16. The placeholder automatically disappears as soon as a user selects the control and begins to enter a value.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 524 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.05 - Explore form layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Defining Default Values and Placeholders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 17. The default behavior of the selection list is to allow only one selection from the list of options.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 534 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.07 - Create a selection list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Selection List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 18. A spinner control can be used to limit a numeric field to a range of possible values, thus allowing the user to drag a marker horizontally across the possible field values.

ANSWER: False - slider control POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 550 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.10 - Create spinners and range sliders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Entering Numeric Data KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 19. Command buttons are created using an input element with the type attribute set to range.

ANSWER: False - button POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 556 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.12 - Create form buttons NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Form Buttons KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 20. Client-side validation takes place on the user's browser.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 559 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.13 - Validate a form NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Multiple Choice 21. A _____ is a control used to enter text strings that may include several lines of content. a. spin box b. check box c. Text area box d. Selection list ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 502 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.01 - Explore web forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 22. Identify a widget that allows the user to interact with the form for entering numeric values confined to a specified range. a. Reset button b. Slider control c. Calendar control d. Option button ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

b 1 Easy HTML 502 Multiple Choice

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.01 - Explore web forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 23. A form contains _____, also called widgets, which are the objects that allow the user to interact with the form. a. controls b. extensions c. pages d. processes ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 502 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.01 - Explore web forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form

24. In the accompanying figure, Box B points to _____. a. option buttons b. selection lists c. input boxes d. spin boxes ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 503 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Figure 7-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.02 - Work with form servers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 25. In the accompanying figure, Box E represents a _____. a. slider control b. spin box Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form c. calendar control d. check box ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 502 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Figure 7-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.01 - Explore web forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 26. A data entry control is associated with a _____ in which data values supplied by the user are stored. a. web server b. data store c. data field d. desktop ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 503 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.02 - Work with form servers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 27. Identify the significance of "text" in <form id="text">. a. It identifies the form. b. It is the content of the form. c. It controls the form process. d. It identifies the form attributes.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form REFERENCES: HTML 504 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.03 - Create forms and field sets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Starting a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 28. get and post are two possible values for the _____ attribute. a. action b. enctype c. class d. method ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 505 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.03 - Create forms and field sets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Starting a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 29. Identify a true statement of a JavaScript program in a web form. a. JavaScript intercepts the content of the form before the browser attempts to contact the CGI script and report whether the data contained in the survey form has been correctly filled out or not. b. JavaScript is a closed-source programming language, which provides tools and a programming

environment for communicating the strategy and overall administration of distributed applications. c. JavaScript is extracted by all layout engines in a similar way; as a consequence, this grounds consistency in terms of functionality and interface. d. JavaScript is a bug-free Visual Basic scripting language, which is used only for networking

applications.

ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

a 1 Easy HTML 506 Multiple Choice False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.02 - Work with form servers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Starting a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 30. Which of the following is true of field sets? a. Field sets can contain a maximum of two fields. b. Field sets are created using the <area> tag. c. Field sets act like control elements that are also called widgets. d. Field sets act like block elements that can expand to accommodate their content.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 508 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.03 - Create forms and field sets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Field Set KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 31. Every field set must contain the _____ element, which should have only text and no nested elements for describing its content. a. legend b. enctype c. script d. form ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 508 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.03 - Create forms and field sets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Field Set KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:42 AM

32. The _____ element is used to mark the form controls that are designed to receive user responses. a. fieldset b. legend c. input d. script ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 510 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Input Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 33. If no _____ value is specified, the browser assumes a default value of text and adds a simple text input box to the web form. a. id b. type c. name d. class ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 510 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Input Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form

34. In the accompanying figure, what does Box A represent? a. Check box b. Radio button c. Input box d. Label button ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 513 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Figure 7-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Input Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 35. By default, browsers display input boxes as _____ elements with a default length of 20 characters. a. inline b. page c. block d. form ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 513 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Input Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 36. To associate a text string entered above each input element with a control, the text string should be enclosed within the _____ element. a. script b. label c. legend d. fieldset ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 514 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Field Labels KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 37. Which of the following is true of nesting a control within a label? a. It allows the user to move both the label text and the control as a single unit around the page. b. It treats both the label and control as separate objects. c. It restricts the association of label text with the control explicitly. d. It restricts the movement of the insertion point into the control on the selection of the linked label.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 515 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Field Labels KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:42 AM

38. _____ are text strings that appear within a form control, providing a hint about the kind of data that should be entered into the field. a. Placeholders b. Labels c. Scripts d. Widgets ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 524 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.05 - Explore form layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Defining Default Values and Placeholders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 39. Identify the cross-browser style sheet that changes the text color of the placeholder text for every input box to light red for the moz extension. a. input:-moz-input-placeholder {color: rgb (255, 151, 151);} b. input::-moz-placeholder {color: rgb(255, 151, 151);} c. input:-moz-placeholder {color: rgb (255, 151, 151);} d. input:: moz-placeholder-webkit {color: rgb(255, 151, 151);} ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 525 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.05 - Explore form layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Defining Default Values and Placeholders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 40. Identify a syntax that sets the data type of the registerDate field to “date”. a. <label for=”register”>Date of registration</label> <input name=”Date” id=”register” /> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form b. <label for=”register”>Date of registration</label> <input name=”registerDate” id=”date” /> c. <label for=”register”>Date of registration</label> <input name=”registerDate” id=”register” type=”date” /> d. <label for=”register”>Date of registration</label> <input name=”registerDate” id=”date” type=”register” /> ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 531 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.06 - Work with date and time fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Entering Date and Time Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 41. A(n) _____ is created using the select and option elements that present users with a group of predefined possible values for the data field. a. option button b. selection list c. check box d. text area ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 531 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.07 - Create a selection list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Selection List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 42. Identify a syntax of the option element that contains an attribute to make an option as default in a selection list. a. <option value="value" for>text</option> b. <option value=”value” enctype>text</option> c. <option value=”value” selected>text</option> d. <option value=”value” default>text</option> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 532 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.07 - Create a selection list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Selection List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 43. Identify a syntax that displays a selection list as a scroll box with 5 options visible in the web form. a. <select size=”5”> ... </select> b. <option size=”5”> ... </option> c. <select value=”5”> ... </select> d. <option value=”5”> ... </option> ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 533 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.07 - Create a selection list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Selection List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 44. Identify the element that can organize selection list options by placing them in option groups in long selection lists. a. optgroup b. select c. opgroup d. selgroup ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

a 1 Easy HTML 535 Multiple Choice False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.07 - Create a selection list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Selection List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 45. _____ are like selection lists in which they limit fields to a set of possible values; but, unlike selection lists, the options appear as separate controls in the web form. a. Text area boxes b. Slider controls c. Radio buttons d. Color pickers ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 537 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.08 - Create option buttons NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Option Buttons KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 46. The check box control is created using the _____ element. a. input b. select c. option d. label ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 540 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.09 - Create check boxes and text area boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Check Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:42 AM

47. HTML supports the _____ attributes to set the text area size. a. rows and cols b. x-coords and y-coords c. blocks and chars d. headers and footers ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 542 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.09 - Create check boxes and text area boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Text Area Box KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 48. A _____ is used to restrict numeric values by displaying an up or down arrow to increase or decrease the field value by a set amount. a. spinner control b. check box c. radio button d. data list ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 548 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.10 - Create spinners and range sliders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Entering Numeric Data KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 49. Identify a syntax used to create a spinner control using an input element. a. <input name=”name” id=”id” type=”number” value=”value” step=”value” min=”value” max=”value” /> b. <input name=”name” id=”id” type=”number” Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form value=”value” set=”value” min=”value” max=”value” /> c. <input name=”name” id=”id” type=”number” value=”value” size=”value” min=”value” max=”value” /> d. <input name=”name” id=”id” type=”number” value=”value” area="value" min=”value” max=”value” /> ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 548 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.10 - Create spinners and range sliders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Entering Numeric Data KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 50. Identify the widget that limits a numeric field to a range of possible values by allowing users to drag a marker horizontally across the possible field values. a. Spinner control b. Slider control c. Data list d. Selection list ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 550 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.10 - Create spinners and range sliders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Entering Numeric Data KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 51. Identify a data type applied in an input element to create slider controls. a. number b. range c. character d. string ANSWER:

b

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 550 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.10 - Create spinners and range sliders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Entering Numeric Data KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 52. Identify a list which when applied to an input box, the values appear as a pop-up list of suggested values. a. Nested List b. Data list c. Ordered list d. Selection list ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 553 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.11 - Use data lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Suggesting Options with Data Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 53. Identify the type of control that performs an action. a. A selection list b. A form button c. An input box d. A text area ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 556 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.12 - Create form buttons Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Working with Form Buttons Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

54. Command buttons are created using the input element with the type attribute set to _____. a. range b. number c. command d. button ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 556 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.12 - Create form buttons NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Form Buttons KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 55. The ____ element is used to create a custom option. a. command b. file c. input d. button ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 559 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.12 - Create form buttons NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Form Buttons KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form 56. The process of ensuring that the user has supplied correct data is called _____. a. validation b. submission c. correction d. identification ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 559 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.13 - Validate a form NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 57. The _____ attribute must be added to the control to identify whether the data has been supplied to those fields that are opposed to the ones that are optional. a. method b. enctype c. required d. default ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 559 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.13 - Validate a form NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 58. Identify an attribute that can be added to the input element to validate a text value against a regular expression. a. legend="text" b. method="text" c. enctype="regex" d. pattern="regex" Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 562 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.13 - Validate a form NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 59. The technique of immediate data validation and reporting of errors is known as _____. a. server-side validation b. inline validation c. online validation d. client-side validation ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 565 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.14 - Apply validation styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying Inline Validations KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 60. Identify a pseudo-class for a check box or option button whose toggle states cannot be ascertained. a. valid b. optional c. in-range d. indeterminate ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

d 1 Easy HTML 566 Multiple Choice False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.14 - Apply validation styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying Inline Validations KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 7-1 Oscar owns Oscar's Skateboard Shop. He wants to create a web form to allow users to specify the type of skateboards they would like to buy. This includes the make, model, type and color, and board options. Oscar's skateboards come in Children, Young Adult, and Adult sizes. Oscar's skateboards come in different colors, patterns, and themes. He has over 25 makes and models of skateboards.

61. Oscar wants the web form to allow users to select the delivery date for the items he purchases. To select the dates, Oscar should use a _____. a. calendar control b. check box c. radio button d. hover dropdown ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 502 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 7-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.01 - Explore web forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 62. Oscar’s skateboards are manufactured in different hues. Which of the following features should Oscar add to allow customers to choose a shade of their choice? a. Slider controls b. Spin boxes c. Color pickers d. Selection lists ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 502 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 7-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.01 - Explore web forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 63. Which of the following can Oscar use to display a list of makes and models of skateboards? a. Text area boxes b. Radio buttons c. Selection lists d. Slider controls ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 531 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 7-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.07 - Create a selection list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Selection List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Case 7-2 Wyona, the owner of Wyona’s Hat Designs, desires to have a web site built for customers to order custom-made hats.

They can pick from straw, leather, and other material hat collections. Customers can specify one of their existing patterns, which includes about 50 designs. They can also choose a custom pattern instead and then provide information about the pattern they want for Wyona to custom create.

64. Which type of field should Wyona provide for the user to provide plenty of space for customers to enter the information for a custom pattern? a. Input boxes b. Check boxes c. Spin boxes d. Text area boxes ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form REFERENCES: HTML 502 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 7-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.01 - Explore web forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 65. Wyona wants to ensure that the text box should accept only 5 characters for entering a zip code. Which attribute of a text box will allow her to do this? a. maxlength b. size c. codevalue d. character ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 564 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 7-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.13 - Validate a form NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Completion 66. The _________ element is an HTML element used to access and run JavaScript programs that will run within the user’s browser. script ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 505 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.03 - Create forms and field sets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Starting a Web Form Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

67. Grouping dozens of different fields into a _________ that a web form can have, makes the form easier to interpret and more accessible.

ANSWER: field set POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 507 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.03 - Create forms and field sets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Field Set KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 68. The _________ attribute is always needed in an input element while submitting the form to a server. name ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 510 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Input Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 69. Most mobile and tablet devices do not have physical keyboards; instead, they use _________ that exist as software representations of the physical device.

ANSWER: virtual keyboards POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 514 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating Input Boxes Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

70. _________ are text strings that appear within a form control, providing a hint about the kind of data that should be entered into the field.

ANSWER: Placeholders POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 524 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.05 - Explore form layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Defining Default Values and Placeholders KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 71. By default, a _________ appears as a drop-down list box.

ANSWER: selection list POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 533 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.07 - Create a selection list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Selection List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 72. A check box can be selected automatically by adding the _________ attribute to the input element. checked ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 540 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.09 - Create check boxes and text area boxes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating Check Boxes Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

73. The _________ attribute is added to the input element to apply a data list. list, <input list="id"/> ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 553 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.11 - Use data lists NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Suggesting Options with Data Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 74. A _________ is a button that runs a program, which affects the content of the page or the actions of the browser.

ANSWER: command button POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 556 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.12 - Create form buttons NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Form Buttons KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 75. The process of validation that takes place on the web user is called _________.

ANSWER: server-side validation POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 559 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.13 - Validate a form Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Validating a Web Form Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

76. _________ refers to the state in which an element has been clicked by the user, making it the active control on the form.

ANSWER: Focus POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 566 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.14 - Apply validation styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying Inline Validation KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Matching Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. Input boxes b. Selection lists c. Option buttons d. Check boxes e. multipart/form-data f. application/x-www-form-urlencoded g. Form buttons h. text/plain get i. j. enctype k. Option groups l. hidden DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

Easy HTML 502 HTML 504 HTML 537 HTML 556 HTML 511 HTML 535 HTML 505 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.01 - Explore web forms 07.02 - Work with form servers 07.03 - Create forms and field sets 07.04 - Create labels and input boxes 07.07 - Create a selection list Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form 07.08 - Create option buttons 07.12 - Create form buttons NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Web Forms Creating Option Buttons Starting a Web Form Working with Form Buttons Creating Input Boxes Creating a Selection List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 77. Used for selecting data values limited to two possibilities, such as “yes” or “no” ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 78. Created with a group of input elements with a type attribute value of radio, sharing a common data field name ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 79. The format in which data is transferred as plain text with spaces replaced with the + character, but no other encoding of the data values occurs ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 80. Processes the form when clicked ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 81. Used for a long sequence of options ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 82. The default format in which the data is encoded as a long text string with spaces replaced by the + character and special characters replaced with their hexadecimal code values ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 83. The format used when uploading files in which no encoding of the data values occurs ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 84. Used to create an email field that is part of the form but not displayed ANSWER: l POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form 85. Used to group items on a drop-down list ANSWER: k POINTS: 1 86. Used to append the form data to the end of the URL ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 87. Specifies how the form data should be encoded as it is sent to the server ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 88. Used for text and numerical entries ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 Essay 89. What are the attributes that tell the browser how the form should interact with the web server?

ANSWER: To specify where to send the form data and how to send it, the following action, method, and enctype attributes are defined. <form action=”url” method=”type” enctype=”type”>content </form> Here, the action attribute provides the location of the web server program that processes the form; the method attribute specifies how the browser should send form data to the server; and the enctype attribute specifies how the form data should be encoded as it is sent to the server. The method attribute has two possible values: get and post. The default is the get method, which tells the browser to append the form data to the end of the URL specified in the action attribute. The post method sends the form data in its own separate data stream. The enctype attribute has three possible values in predefined formats for a specific purpose.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 505 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.03 - Create forms and field sets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Starting a Web Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form 90. Describe the types of layouts that are used to design a form.

ANSWER: To be effective, the layout of the form should aid the user in interpreting the form and navigating easily from one input control to the next. There are two general layouts, one in which the labels are placed directly above the input controls in a single column and the other in which the labels and controls are placed side by side in two columns.

Usability studies have shown that a single column layout is more accessible because the labels are placed more closely to their input controls. However, for long forms involving many fields, a single column layout can be difficult to work with due to the extensive vertical space required.

The width of an input box is set by adding the following size attribute to the input element in the HTML file as given below: size=”chars” Here, chars is the width of the input box in characters. For example, the following input element sets the width of the input box for a field to two characters: <input id=”state” size=”2” type=”text” /> POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 516 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.05 - Explore form layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing a Form Layout KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 91. What are the pseudo-classes for valid and invalid data?

ANSWER: The valid and invalid pseudo-classes are used to format controls based on whether their field values pass a validation test or not. For example, the following style rule displays all the input elements containing invalid data with a light red background: In put: invalid { background-color: rgb (255, 232, 233); } On the other hand, the following style rule displays all the input elements containing valid data with a light green background: input: valid { background-color: rgb (220, 255, 220); } Both of these style rules set the background color whether the input element has the focus or not. Displaying a form full of input backgrounds with different background colors can be confusing and distracting to the user. As a result, it is better practice to highlight invalid field values only when those input controls have the focus, as shown in the following style rule that combines both the focus and invalid pseudo-classes: input:focus:invalid { background-color: rgb (255, 232, 233); } Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 07: Designing a Web Form POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 567 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 07.14 - Apply validation styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying Inline Validations KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia True / False 1. A challenge in delivering multimedia content is presenting it in a form that can be retrieved quickly and

easily without loss of quality. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 588 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 2. The advantage of lossless compression is that the same level of compression is achieved as with lossy

compression. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 588 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 3. When a browser is unable to play an MP3 version or an OGG version of an audio file, a message is displayed

as a fallback option asking the user to upgrade it. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

True 1 Moderate

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia REFERENCES: HTML 596 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.03 - Support multiple audio formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4. A video file typically contains a single codec that is used for both audio and video images. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 602 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.04 - Insert an HTML video clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Digital Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 5. When making tracks with Web Video Text Tracks (WebVTT), white spaces are ignored. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 608 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia 6. By default, the caption cues are centered at the top of the video window. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 610 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 7. A plug-in works within a browser with CSS and JavaScript files to present a customizable player. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 619 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.04 - Insert an HTML video clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Third-Party Video Players KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 8. When setting the transition timing, it must be ensured that the speed of the transition is constant. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 626 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.08 - Explore transition attributes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating Transitions with CSS Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

9. A transition must start immediately after an event that triggers it. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 629 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.07 - Create a CSS transition NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Transitions with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 10. An animation is limited to two style rules defined at the initial and end states. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 634 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.07 - Create a CSS transition NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 11. An animation has a single state of operation, so a radio button is used to control the animation. a. True b. False ANSWER: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 641 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.10 - Apply a CSS animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Modified True / False 12. The original purpose of the web and HTML was to deliver textual information via separate hypertext

documents.

ANSWER:

False - interconnected POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 588 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 13. Using lossless compression, nonessential data are removed to achieve a smaller file size.

ANSWER: False - lossy compression POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 588 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia 14. In the audio element <audio src=”url” attributes />, the url specifies how the audio clip

should be handled by the browser.

ANSWER: False - attributes POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 591 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 15. The src, type, height, and width attributes can be applied to the embed element for any plug-in.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 598 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.03 - Support multiple audio formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Embedded Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 16. When a media player initially loads a video file, the player shows the last video frame as a preview of the

video’s content.

ANSWER: False - first POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 606 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.04 - Insert an HTML video clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using the HTML5 video Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:42 AM

17. The language of the subtitle that is added to a media clip must be specified in the descriptions attribute

in the track element.

ANSWER:

False - srclang

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 607 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 18. To format specific cues or text strings within a cue section, the cue text is identified using markup tags such

as <span></span> for a span of text.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 613 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 19. Transition is a technique of creating the illusion of movement by displaying a sequence of changing images

in rapid succession.

ANSWER:

False - Animation POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 634 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.09 - Create a CSS key frame animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Animating Objects with CSS Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

20. When applying an animation, the animation name must be listed first while the other properties can be listed

in any order.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 638 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.09 - Create a CSS key frame animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 21. When controlling an animation, if a check box is selected the animation pauses.

ANSWER: False - plays POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 640 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.09 - Create a CSS key frame animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 22. The task of controlling video playback requires an external JavaScript program as there are no CSS styles to

control the video playback.

ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

True 1 Easy HTML 647 Modified True / False False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.10 - Apply a CSS animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Multiple Choice 23. _____ compress data so that it can be transmitted in a fast and efficient manner and then decompress it when

it is to be read or played back. a. Codecs b. Bitmaps c. Add-ons d. Tokens ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 588 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 24. Data is compressed by removing redundant information using _____ compression. a. lossless b. lossy c. irreversible d. reversible ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 588 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

25. Consider the following text string consisting of four As followed by five Bs and six Cs. Identify a string that

ensures no loss of information. a. 4A5B6C b. A3B4C5 c. ABC345 d. 456ABC ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 588 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 26. Codecs are placed within a _____ that handles the packaging, transportation, and presentation of data. a. container b. table c. windows d. cell ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 588 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 27. Once an audiovisual aid has been stored within a container file, a _____ is required to decode and play that Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia content. a. bitmap b. command prompt c. media player d. clipboard ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 589 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 28. A plug-in either opens in its own external window or runs within a web page as a(n) _____. a. embedded object b. isolated object c. root object d. source object ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 589 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 29. Which of the following is true of the plug-in approach to deliver multimedia content? a. A common plug-in is available across all browsers, operating systems, and devices. b. Plug-ins are reliable and secure. c. A plug-in requires users to install a separate application in addition to their web browsers. d. Plug-ins consume valuable system resources, resulting in fast and reliable performance.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 589 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 30. Which of the following audio elements is used to embed audio clips within a web page? a. <audio src=”url” attributes /> b. <audio src=attributes /> c. </audio src=”url” “attributes”> d. </audio src=”attributes”/> ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 591 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 31. In the context of HTML audio and video element attributes, the _____ attribute’s type includes auto,

none, and metadata. a. autoplay b. muted c. preload d. loop ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

c 1 Easy HTML 591

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 32. In the context of HTML audio and video element attributes, the preload attribute’s type _____ is used to

preload only descriptive data about a particular clip. a. metadata b. descriptions c. auto d. captions ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 591 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 33. Which of the following MIME types is supported by Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) file format embedded in an HTML page? a. .wav b. .m4a c. .dvf d. .ogg ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 592 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Working with the audio Element Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

34. Which of the following audio formats in HTML provides better sound quality, especially at lower bit rates? a. .ogg b. .mp3 c. .wav d. .aiff ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 592 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 35. Which of the following browsers supports all audio formats such as MP3, Advanced Audio Coding (AAC),

Ogg, and WAV? a. Google Chrome b. Microsoft Internet Explorer c. Opera d. Safari ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 592 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.03 - Support multiple audio formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia 36. Which of the following languages is used to set the width of a media player, add borders, drop shadows, and

apply filters and transformations to the media player’s appearance? a. Ruby b. CSS c. PHP d. Perl ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 595 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 37. Colin has created a web page that supports multiple audio sources. However, he is unsure if the browsers

used by his clients will support the audio format he has included. Which of the following must he include in the code to notify the clients about any browser upgradation required to play an audio file? a. cue label b. text track c. fallback option d. kind attribute ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 596 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.03 - Support multiple audio formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 38. The video codec used for the Ogg video format is _____. a. H.264 b. VP9 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia c. Truespeech d. Theora ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 602 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.04 - Insert an HTML video clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Digital Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 39. Which of the following browsers supports only the MPEG-4 video format? a. Safari b. Chrome c. Firefox d. Opera ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 602 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.04 - Insert an HTML video clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Digital Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 40. In the element <track kind=”type” src=”url” label=”text” srclang=”lang” />, the

_____ attribute defines the track category. a. kind b. label c. srclang d. src ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

a 1 Moderate

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia REFERENCES: HTML 607 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 41. The value of the kind attribute that provides long explanations synced to specified time points within a

media clip is _____. a. metadata b. captions c. srclang d. descriptions ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 607 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 42. Identify the kind attribute that is a default translation of a dialog from a media clip whose language is

specified in the srclang attribute. a. descriptions b. chapters c. captions d. subtitles ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 607 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Adding a Text Track to Video Bloom’s: Medium 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

43. Which of the following is true of the default attribute when adding text tracks to a video file? a. It enables all the available tracks by marking them as default. b. It enables the active track by marking it with the default attribute. c. The default attribute is not required when there is a single track available. d. The default attribute is not required when there are multiple tracks available.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 607 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 44. Which of the following structures is the format of a Web Video Text Tracks file? a. WebVTT

cue1 cue2 … b. WEBVTT cue1 cue2 … c.

WVtt cue1 cue2 … d. WVTT cue1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia cue2 …

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 607 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Medium DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 45. Which of the following is true of a cue in a Web Video Text Tracks file? a. The cue is matched with specific time intervals within a media clip. b. The cue label holds the text of the cue. c. The cue lists are separated by a comma after a cue text. d. The cue times are entered in hh:ss:ms format.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 608 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Medium DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 46. For longer video clips, the time in the cue is written in the form _____. a. hh:mm:ss.ms b. hh.ms:ss c. hh.mm.ss d. ms:ss.mm:hh ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

a 1 Easy

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia REFERENCES: HTML 608 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 47. The cue attribute _____ sets the width of a cue as the percentage of the width of a video window. a. position:value b. line:value c. align:value d. size:value ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 611 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 48. The cue attribute _____ places a cue vertically within the video window, where value ranges from 0%

(top) to 100% (bottom). a. position:value b. line:value c. vertical:type d. size:value ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 611 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Adding a Text Track to Video Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

49. Ria is creating a website that includes videos. She wants to apply subtitles to the video clip and arrange the

text horizontally within the cue. Which of the following cue attributes should she include in the code to accomplish this? a. position:value b. line:value c. align:value d. size:value ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 611 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 50. The styles for the _____ pseudo-element are limited to the background, color, font, opacity,

outline, text-decoration, text-shadow, visibility, and white-space properties. a. kind b. cue c. embed d. iframe ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 612 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:42 AM

51. Which of the following Flash player parameters recognizes a movie so that it can be referenced and has a

value of text? a. id b. flashvar c. name d. wmode ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 617 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Third-Party Video Players KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 52. _____ are windows that are embedded within a web page that displays the content of another page or

Internet resource. a. Inline frames b. Key frames c. Framesets d. Frame vectors ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 619 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.05 - Write a video caption track NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Third-Party Video Players KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Medium DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 53. _____ is an HTML5 audio and video player with support for Flash and Microsoft Silverlight. a. MediaElement.js Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia b. Projekktor c. Flowplayer d. Video.js ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 620 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Third-Party Video Players KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 54. Which of the following is true of a transition? a. It is a quick and instantaneous process and does not involve any steps in between to provide the

styles. b. It is an event initiated automatically by a browser. c. It retains an object’s style from the initial state till the ending state. d. It slows down the change to an object’s style and provides intermediate styles.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 624 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.07 - Create a CSS transition NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Transitions with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia 55. Which of the following set of transition properties depicts the given image? a. Initial state

background: white; color: black; transition: background 4s; End state background: green; color: white; b. Initial state background: white; color: white; transition: 0s; End state background: white; color: black; c. Initial state background: white; color: white; End state background: white; color: black; transition: background 4s; d. Initial state background: green; color: white; End state background: white; color: black; transition: background 4s; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 625 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Ch 8 Figure 55 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.07 - Create a CSS transition Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating Transitions with CSS Bloom’s: Apply 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

56. Which of the following timing-function keywords allows a transition to occur at a constant rate and

then slow down toward the end? a. alternate-reverse b. linear-backwards c. ease-out d. ease-in-out ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 627 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.08 - Explore transition attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Transitions with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 57. Which of the following timing-function keywords allows a transition to occur more rapidly at the

beginning and slow down near the end? a. ease b. ease-in c. ease-out d. ease-in-out ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 627 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.08 - Explore transition attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Transitions with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:42 AM

58. In the accompanying figure, the value of the timing-function is _____. a. alternate-reverse b. linear-backwards c. ease-out d. ease-in ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 627 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Ch 8 Figure 58 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.08 - Explore transition attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Transitions with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia

59. In the accompanying figure of graphing the transition timings, the vertical axis measures the progress of the

transition toward completion and the horizontal axis measures the duration. Which of the following graphs labelled A, B, C, and D represents the ease-in-out timing? a. A b. D c. B d. C ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 628 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Ch 8 Figure 59 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.08 - Explore transition attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Transitions with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 60. Which of the following is true of animating objects in CSS? a. Animation creates an illusion of movement by displaying key frames in rapid succession. b. Animation is limited to two style rules defined at the initial and end states.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia c. Animations can be run only once as multiple images in rapid motion to a page object. d. Animations can only be run when a CSS property is being changed.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 634 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.09 - Create a CSS key frame animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 61. When animating objects with CSS, the key frame values 0% and 100% can be replaced with the keywords

_____. a. from and to b. first and last c. start and end d. open and close ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 635 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.09 - Create a CSS key frame animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 62. Identify an animation property that repeats the animation being played without stopping. a. animation-iteration-count = infinite b. animation-timing-function = ease c. animation-play-state = running d. animation-delay = time ANSWER: POINTS:

a 1

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 638 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.09 - Create a CSS key frame animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 8-1 Ryan is creating a website for an automobile company. He wants to include media files on the web page and make the page appealing to the viewers.

63. Ryan wants a particular embedded media clip to automatically restart when it has finished playing. Which of

the following HTML audio and video element attributes must Ryan include in his code to accomplish this? a. src b. loop c. controls d. preload ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 591 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CT Case 8-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 64. Ryan wants to embed the audio clip within the page, but he does not want the browser’s native media player

to show up. Which of the following HTML audio and video element attributes will help Ryan accomplish this? a. autoplay b. loop c. controls Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia d. preload ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 591 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CT Case 8-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 65. Ryan wants to embed an audio clip within the web page he is creating. Which of the following snippets must

he include to embed an audio element in the web page along with the source and the type files? a. <audio controls> <source src=”cp_overture.wav” type=”audio/ogg”/> </audio> b. <audio controls> <source src=”cp_overture.ogg” type=”audio/.mp4”/> </audio> c. <audio controls> <source src=”cp_overture.m4a” type=”audio/ogg”/> </audio> d. <audio controls> <source src=”cp_overture.aac” type=”audio/mp4”/> </audio> ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 592 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CT Case 8-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 8-2 Pete is designing a web page for a clothing company. He wants to show the different types of clothing lines available through a video. He wishes to use Adobe Flash Player to play the videos on the website.

66. Pete wants to set the playback quality parameter of the movie where the display quality of the video is

favored over the playback speed. Which of the following values of the quality parameter must he apply to accomplish this? a. low b. true c. false d. high ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 617 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CT Case 8-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.04 - Insert an HTML video clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Third-Party Video Players KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 67. Pete wants to change the appearance of the player against the page background when the video is playing on

the web page. He wants the page background to show via see-through colors in the player. Which of the following values of the wmode parameter must he include in the code to accomplish this? a. transparent b. showall c. exactfit d. autohigh ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 617 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CT Case 8-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.04 - Insert an HTML video clip Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Using Third-Party Video Players Bloom’s: Apply 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

Completion 68. A _________ is a software program accessed by a browser to provide a feature or capability nonnative to the

browser.

ANSWER:

plug-in

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 589 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 69. When embedding an audio element in a web page, the _________ attribute informs a browser of the file

type and speeds up the process of choosing a compatible audio source. type ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 593 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 70. _________ is a royalty-free codec developed by the Xiph.org Foundation that produces video streams that

can be used with almost any container.

ANSWER: Theora POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia REFERENCES: HTML 602 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Digital Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 71. _________ is a widely used proprietary format developed by Apple based on the Apple QuickTime movie

format.

ANSWER:

MPEG-4

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 602 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Digital Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 72. _________ is an open source format developed by the Xiph.org Foundation using the Theora codec as an

alternative to the MPEG-4 codec.

ANSWER: Ogg POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 602 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Digital Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 73. The _________ element, which replaced the embed element, is used for any type of content such as sound,

video clips, graphic images, PDF files, and even the content of other web pages.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia ANSWER:

object

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 616 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Third-Party Video Players KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 74. The Flash player can act as a fallback for older browsers that do not support HTML5 by nesting the

_________ element within the audio or video element. object ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 618 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Third-Party Video Players KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 75. The advantage of the _________ approach is that a wide variety of timings can be defined, including timings

in which a transition can stop, reverse itself, and then go forward again to its end state.

ANSWER: Cubic Bézier curves POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 628 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.08 - Explore transition attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Transitions with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia 76. To define a sequence of key frames in CSS, the _________ rule is applied. @keyframes ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 634 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.09 - Create a CSS key frame animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 77. The animation property _________ sets the length of an animation in seconds or milliseconds. animation-duration = time ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 638 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.09 - Create a CSS key frame animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Matching Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. Container b. source element c. autoplay

d. WAV

e. Plug-in

f. H.264

g. flashvar i. poster

h. captions j. muted

DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

Easy HTML 588 HTML 591 HTML 592 HTML 593 HTML 599

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia HTML 602 HTML 606 HTML 607 HTML 617 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.01 - Understand audio and video formats 08.02 - Insert an HTML audio clip 08.03 - Support multiple audio formats 08.04 - Insert an HTML video clip 08.05 - Write a video caption track 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video Exploring Embedded Objects Using the HTML5 video Element Using Third-Party Video Players Working with the audio Element Introducing Multimedia on the Web KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 78. It is the original audio format for Windows PCs, which is commonly used for storing uncompressed audio,

making it impractical for all but the shortest audio clips.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 79. It is essentially the file format that is identified by a file extension.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 80. It is nested within a single audio section to provide several versions of the same media file.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 81. It is the industry standard for high-definition video streams.

ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 82. It starts the performance of a media clip as soon as it is loaded by the browser.

ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 83. It contains text values that are passed to the player to control the behavior and the content of a movie.

ANSWER: g Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia POINTS: 1 84. It is a brief text description that is synced to specified time points within the media clip.

ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 85. It acts as a fallback option for browsers that do not support the HTML5 multimedia elements by adding the

embed element.

ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 86. This attribute specifies that the audio output should be suppressed.

ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 87. This attribute is applied to the video element to define a video’s preview image.

ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 Essay 88. Why is the fallback option provided to an audio clip?

ANSWER: It is considered bad design to add a feature to a web page without also providing

some fallback option to users who cannot take advantage of that feature. One type of fallback option is used by specifying two audio sources so that if the browser cannot play the MP3 version of the audio clip, it can attempt to play the OGG version.

If the browser cannot play either version or does not support the audio element at all, the user can follow the source elements with HTML code that the browser will recognize. The simplest fallback option is a text string indicating that the user needs to upgrade the browser to take advantage of the feature you added to the page.

Plug-ins can act as a fallback option for browsers that do not support the HTML5 multimedia elements by adding the embed element to the end of the audio element as the last option for the browser.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 596 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.03 - Support multiple audio formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with the audio Element DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia 89. Briefly describe the styles applied to track cues.

ANSWER: CSS supports the following cue pseudo-element to format the appearance of the cues

appearing within a media clip: ::cue { styles } The styles for the cue pseudo-element are limited to the background, color, font, opacity, outline, text-decoration, text-shadow, visibility, and white-space properties. For example, the following style rule displays all cues in a 2em yellow serif font on a red background: ::cue { background: red; color: yellow; font: 2em serif; } The cue pseudo-element selects all of the cue text in the media clip. To format specific cues or text strings within a cue, a user can identify the sections of the cue text using the following markup tags: • <i></i> for italicized text • <b></b> for bold-faced text • <u></u> for underlined text • <span></span> to mark spans of text • <ruby></ruby> to mark ruby text • <rt></rt> to mark ruby text WebVTT also supports tags that are not part of the HTML library, such as the following <c></c> tag used to mark text strings belonging to a particular class: <c.classname></c> Here, classname defines the class.

And for captions that distinguish one voice from another, WebVTT supports the following <v></v> tag: <v name></v> Here, name is the name of the voice associated with the caption.

For cues based on their class name, add the class name to the cue pseudo-element as follows: ::cue(.classname) { style rules } Here, classname is the class marked within in the <c></c> tag.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 08: Enhancing a Website with Multimedia To format voice text, use the style rule as follows: ::cue(v[voice=name]) { style rules } Here, name is the name assigned in the <v></v> tag.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 612 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.06 - Format video captions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding a Text Track to Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM 90. Briefly explain how to control an animation.

ANSWER: In many applications, a user may not want an animation to start automatically when

the page loads but rather in response to the user clicking a form button. The user can control an animation using JavaScript or a CSS solution.

Because an animation can have two states of operation—play or pause—a user can utilize a check box to control the animation. If the check box is selected, the animation will play; if the check box is not selected, the animation will be paused.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 640 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 08.09 - Create a CSS key frame animation NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Animating Objects with CSS KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:42 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript True / False 1. Server-side and client-side programming are the two main types of web-based programming. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 668 2. JavaScript is a procedural language that needs a compiler to translate the code into machine language. a. True b. False ANSWER: False REFERENCES: HTML 669 3. JavaScript is case sensitive. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 675 4. A logical error is the easiest to fix as the errors in the code can be traced easily. a. True b. False ANSWER: False REFERENCES: HTML 677 5. JavaScript demands strict application of rules for syntax and program structure. a. True b. False ANSWER: False REFERENCES: HTML 680 6. Any command that references a document object before the browser has parsed the HTML code will result in

an error because those objects do not yet reside in memory. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 685 7. Both HTML tags and text content can be returned by the innerHTML property. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 689 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript 8. A variable requires an initial value to be defined. a. True b. False ANSWER: False REFERENCES: HTML 693 9. Parameters are treated as variables within a function. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 714 10. There is no limit to the number of time-delayed commands a browser can process. a. True b. False ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 718 Modified True / False 11. The script element can be placed anywhere within the HTML document.

ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 670 12. The async attribute stalls script processing until after the page has been completely parsed and loaded.

ANSWER: False - defer REFERENCES: HTML 670 13. JavaScript comments can be entered on single or multiple lines.

ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 673 14. An object can be modified by changing its properties or by applying a method.

ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 688 15. The first character of a variable must be a numeral or an underscore character ( _ ).

ANSWER: False - letter REFERENCES: HTML 693 16. If no value is assigned to a Boolean variable, it is interpreted as having a value of true.

ANSWER: False - false REFERENCES: HTML 694 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript 17. JavaScript supports methods to change the date stored within a Date object.

ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 700 18. The Math.round(x) method rounds the value of x down to the next lowest integer.

ANSWER: False - Math.floor(x) REFERENCES: HTML 707 19. In JavaScript, the clearTimeout() method is used to clear all repeated commands.

ANSWER: False - clearInterval() REFERENCES: HTML 719 20. An Infinity value is generated for an operation whose result is less than the smallest numeric value.

ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 721 21. The isNaN(value) function returns a Boolean value of true if the value is not numeric.

ANSWER: True REFERENCES: HTML 720 Multiple Choice 22. JavaScript is used as a programming tool for: a. managing databases. b. designing style sheets for websites. c. creating interactive web forms and animated graphics. d. providing virtual reality, diagnosis, and nonlinear controls.

ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 668 23. _____ programming distributes the load to prevent a server from getting overloaded with program-related

requests. a. Client-side b. Server-side c. Inductive d. Semantic ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 669 24. _____ is the programming language for client-side programs. a. Perl b. JavaScript c. C# Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript d. PHP ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 669 25. JavaScript code is attached to an HTML file using the _____ element. a. label b. java c. script d. attach ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 670 26. A user can create an embedded script by removing the _____ attribute and placing all of the JavaScript code

within the script element. a. method b. src c. enctype d. id ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 670 27. The _____ attribute tells a browser to parse the HTML and JavaScript code together, only pausing to process

the script before returning to the HTML file. a. async b. defer c. src d. type ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 670 28. A command that indicates an action for the browser to take should end with a _____. a. semicolon b. backslash c. colon d. forward slash ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 674 29. Identify a command that displays a dialog box containing the message “Hello World!”. a. Window.alert(“Hello World!”); b. Window.Alert(“Hello World!”); c. window.alert(“Hello World!”); Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript d. window.Alert(“Hello World!”); ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 674 30. To break a text string into several lines, which means that the text string continues on the next line, the

_____ character should be used. a. forward slash b. backslash c. colon d. semicolon ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 676 31. _____ is the process of locating and fixing a programming error. a. Scripting b. Buffering c. Debugging d. Booting ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 677 32. A _____ occurs after a script has been successfully loaded with no syntax errors and is being executed by a

browser. a. load-time error b. run-time error c. logical error d. fatal error ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 677 33. Identify a shortcut key on the keyboard to open the debugging tools. a. F9 b. F12 c. F8 d. F10 ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 677 34. The technique for locating the source of an error is to set up _____, which are locations where the browser

will pause the program, allowing the programmer to determine the error at that position. a. breakpoints b. thresholds c. blocks Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript d. lapses ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 679 35. Developers advocate that JavaScript be run in _____ in which all lapses in syntax result in load-time or run-

time errors. a. protect mode b. private mode c. safe mode d. strict mode ANSWER: d REFERENCES: HTML 680 36. Identify a statement that is added to the first line of the file to run a script in strict mode. a. “use strict”; b. “mode strict”; c. use: strict d. mode: strict ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 680 37. To avoid fatal errors, it is advised to apply the _____ statement locally only to functions that are created

rather than globally as the first line of the script file. a. “use strict”; b. “use local”; c. “use global”; d. “use moderate”; ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 681 38. A video embedded on a web page is a(n) _____ and has properties such as source of the video file or the

width and height of the video player. a. class b. method c. object d. event ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 684 39. _____ are intrinsic to the JavaScript language. a. Built-in objects b. Event-driven objects Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript c. Browser objects d. Customized objects ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 684 40. Which of the following is created by a programmer for use in an application. a. Built-in objects b. Browser objects c. Document objects d. Customized objects ANSWER: d REFERENCES: HTML 684 41. Which of the following can be referenced only after the browser has finished parsing the page content? a. Built-in objects b. Browser objects c. Document objects d. Customized objects ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 685 42. The _____ attribute can be applied to the script element to ensure that an object can be referenced within

a JavaScript program that runs only after the page has completed loading. a. async b. defer c. charset d. type ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 685 43. Objects are organized into groups called _____. a. object collections b. object pools c. object buckets d. object topologies ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 685 44. Identify an expression that can be used to refer an element by its id attribute. a. document.getElementById(id) b. Document.getElementbyID(id) Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript c. document.getelementById(id) d. Document.getelementByID(id) ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 687 45. Identify an expression used to apply a method to an object. a. object.object(method) b. Object.name(method) c. object.method(values) d. Object.name(values) ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 688 46. Identify a property used to refer an HTML code that is stored within a page element. a. element.innerHTML b. element.textContent c. element.offsetTop d. element.insertAdjacentHTML ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 689 47. The _____ property should be used only when no markup tags are involved. a. innerHTML b. outerHTML c. textContent d. insertAdjacentHTML ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 692 48. A(n) _____ is a named item in a program that stores a data value, such as a number or text string, or an

object, such as a part of the web browser or browser window. a. variable b. entity c. constant d. class ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 693 49. A(n) _____ is any group of characters enclosed within either double or single quotation marks in JavaScript. a. entity b. text string c. null value Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript d. object ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 694 50. Identify a command that uses the dateDiv variable to refer the page element with ID dateNow. a. var dateDiv = document.getElementById(“dateNow”); b. var dateNow = document.getElementById(dateDiv), c. var dateNow = document.getElementById(“dateDiv”); d. var dateDiv = document.getElementById(dateNow), ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 695 51. Identify an expression that defines a date object. a. new Date(“month, day, year hrs:mins:secs”); b. new Date(“month day, year” “hrs:mins:secs”); c. new Date(“month day, year hrs:mins:secs”); d. new Date(“month, day, year” hrs:mins:secs); ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 695 52. Which of the following methods of the Math operator rounds x up to the next highest integer? a. Math.round(x) b. Math.ceil(x) c. Math.rand(x) d. Math.floor(x) ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 608 53. Identify a syntax to access any of the mathematical constants supported by the Math object. a. math.constant b. Math.CONSTANT c. math.CONSTANT d. Math.constant ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 712 54. A(n) _____ is a collection of commands that performs an action or returns a value. a. function b. argument c. entity d. pointer ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript REFERENCES: HTML 714 55. Identify a syntax for JavaScript function. a. function_name function(parameters){

commands } b. Function_name function(commands){

parameters } c. function function_name(parameters){

commands } d. Function function_name(commands){ parameters } ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 714 56. Which of the following syntax is used for a function to return a value? a. return value;

function_name(parameters){ commands } b. function return value; { function_name(parameters) commands } c. function function_name(parameters){ commands return value;} d. function_name(parameters) { return value; commands } ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 717 57. Identify the output of the following code.

var x = 8; var y = 6; document.write(x*y);

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript a. 56 b. 48 c. 28 d. 96 ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 717 58. Identify a syntax to set the time-delayed commands. a. SettimeOut(delay); b. Setinterval(interval); c. setTimeout(“command”, delay); d. setInterval(“command”, interval); ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 718 59. Identify a method that repeatedly runs commands at specified time breaks in a function created. a. setInterval(“command”, interval) b. setTimeout(“command”, interval) c. setTimeout(interval, delay) d. setInterval(interval, delay) ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 720 60. Identify a return value for the expression 5/”A” using JavaScript. a. 5 b. NaN c. Infinity d. A ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 720 61. Identify a function that extracts the first numeric value from the text string. a. parseInt(string) b. parseFloat(string) c. isFinite(value) d. isNaN(value) ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 722

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 9-1 Terin has created a page for a training institute that will allow users to browse the training courses provided at Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript the institute. Terin uses JavaScript to write the content using objects and functions. The objects defined in the code are document object, history object, screen object, navigator object, and the location object.

62. Identify an object created by Terin that will contain information about the current URL. a. history object b. screen object c. location object d. navigator object ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 685 63. Terin wants to create an object that will contain information about the browser application. Which of the

following objects must Terin create to accomplish this? a. navigator object b. location object c. history object d. document object ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 685

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 9-2 Robin maintains a web page for updating the metro timings in the city. He would like the website to display the present day’s schedule. To do this, Robin writes a code that includes an object to retrieve the day of the week and then loads the appropriate data into the page.

64. Identify an expression that Robin must use to define the current date on the web page. a. new Date(year, month, day, hrs, mins, secs); b. new date(“hrs”, “mins”, “secs”, “day”, “month”, “year”); c. this.day(hrs, mins, secs, year, month, day), d. this Day(“day”, “month”, “hrs”, “mins”, “secs”, “year”), ANSWER: a REFERENCES: HTML 696 65. Robin includes an expression to the code,

var thisDay = new Date(“May 23, 2018 14:35:05”); Identify the value for the month that will be displayed on the web page by using thisDay.getMonth() method. a. 35 b. 4 c. 14 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript d. 3 ANSWER: b REFERENCES: HTML 697 66. Robin includes an expression to the code,

var thisDay = new Date(“May 23, 2018 14:35:05”); He also includes the method thisDay.getDay() in the code. What is the result for the given method? a. 1 b. 3 c. 4 d. 5 ANSWER: c REFERENCES: HTML 697 Completion 67. A(n) _________ can be created by omitting the src attribute and placing all of the JavaScript code within

the script element so that an external file need not be used. embedded script ANSWER: REFERENCES: HTML 670 68. The browser halts loading a script before trying to execute it if a(n) _________ is detected.

ANSWER: syntax error REFERENCES: HTML 677 69. The _________ error occurs when a script is first loaded by a browser.

ANSWER: load-time REFERENCES: HTML 677 70. A(n) _________ is an entity within the browser or web page that has properties that define it and methods

that can be acted upon it.

ANSWER: object REFERENCES: HTML 684 71. Document objects are organized in hierarchical structures called the _________.

ANSWER: document object model (DOM), DOM REFERENCES: HTML 684 72. When writing an HTML code, changing the value of the _________ property overwrites whatever content is

currently contained within the selected object. innerHTML ANSWER: REFERENCES: HTML 689

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript 73. JavaScript dates are stored as numeric values equal to the number of _________ between the specified date

and January 1, 1970 at midnight.

ANSWER: milliseconds REFERENCES: HTML 697 74. The variables or expressions that operators act upon are called _________.

ANSWER: operands REFERENCES: HTML 704 75. JavaScript includes _________ in its time calculations due to which the seconds value in the countdown

clock is off by a second.

ANSWER: leap seconds REFERENCES: HTML 711 76. A _________ is a JavaScript command that is run after a specified amount of time has passed.

ANSWER: time-delayed command REFERENCES: HTML 718 Matching

Identify the property that best matches the following style rules. a. window.alert(“ ”); b. value.toPrecision(n) c. collection[idref] d. element.outerHTML e. document.anchors f. element.textContent g. Decrement operator h. Run-time error i. value.toFixed(n) j. parseInt(string) REFERENCES: HTML 674 HTML 677 HTML 686 HTML 686 HTML 691 HTML 691 HTML 704 HTML 722 HTML 722 HTML 722 77. It is indicated by the – – symbol, which reduces the operand’s value by 1.

ANSWER: g 78. It returns a text string displaying value to n significant digits either to the left or to the right of the decimal

point.

ANSWER: b 79. It is an object collection in which all the elements are marked with the <a> tag.

ANSWER: e Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript 80. It is a command to create a dialog box containing a message.

ANSWER: a 81. It returns the HTML code within element as well as the HTML code of element itself.

ANSWER: d 82. It is used to reference an object as part of a collection in a document.

ANSWER: c 83. It returns the text within element disregarding any HTML tags.

ANSWER: f 84. It returns a text string displaying value to n decimal places.

ANSWER: i 85. It appears when a fault happens when a browser is unable to complete a line of code.

ANSWER: h 86. It extracts the first integer value from a sequence of characters.

ANSWER: j Essay 87. Explain the syntax rules that must be maintained when writing JavaScript commands.

ANSWER:

Following are some syntax rules for writing a JavaScript command: The first important rule is to include semicolons at the end of each command. JavaScript is case sensitive, so make sure whether or not the letters of a JavaScript command are capitalized. For example, the command below improperly capitalizes the dialog box command as Window.Alert and, as a result, an error will occur when the script is run.

Example of improper capitalization: Window.Alert(“Welcome to Tulsa”); Example of proper capitalization: window.alert(“Welcome to Tulsa”); Like HTML, JavaScript ignores occurrences of extra white space between commands, which makes it easier to read. However, unlike HTML, be careful about line breaks within commands.

A line break placed within the name of a JavaScript command or within a quoted text string will cause an error when the script is run. Thus, the following code will cause the program to fail.

Example of improper line break: window.alert(“Welcome to Tulsa”); If the user wants to break a text string into several lines, he/she can indicate that the text string continues on the next line by using the following backslash \ character.

Example of proper line break: window.alert(“Welcome \ to Tulsa”);

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript To see how the browser will handle errors in the JavaScript code, modify the window.alert command, adding an intentional error using improper capitalization.

REFERENCES: HTML 675-676 88. Explain the syntax to reference objects in JavaScript.

ANSWER:

Each object within a hierarchy is referenced by its object name such as window, document, or navigator.

Because every object aside from the window object is nested within other objects, they can be referenced using the notation, object1.object2.object3... where object1 is at the top of the hierarchy, object2 is a child of object1, and so on.

Thus, to reference the images object nested within the window and document object, one would use the JavaScript expression window.document.images To reference a specific member of an object collection, we can use either collection[idref] or collection.idref where collection is a reference to the object collection, and idref is either an index number representing the position of the object in the collection or the value of the id attribute assigned to the element. The first object in the collection has an index number of 0 with subsequent objects given index numbers of 1, 2, 3, and so on.

Object collections can also be based on tag names using the expression, document.getElementsByTagName(tag) where tag is the name of an HTML element.

Object collections can also be formed from HTML elements belonging to the same class by using the expression document.getElementsByClassName(class) where class is the value of the class attribute from the HTML document.

Another, more efficient approach, is to reference an element by its id or name attribute, using the expression document.getElementsByName(name) document.getElementById(id) Only one object is returned, not a collection, because each id value is unique within an HTML document.

REFERENCES: HTML 685-687 89. Explain briefly about converting between numbers and text.

ANSWER:

Sometimes, it is necessary to convert a number to a text string and vice versa. One way to

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 09: Getting Started with JavaScript convert a number to a text string is by using the + operator to add a text string to a number. For example, the following code uses the + operator to concatenate a numeric value with an empty text string. The result is a text string containing the characters 123. testNumber = 123; // numeric value testString = testNumber + “”; // text string To convert a text string to a number, one can apply an arithmetic operator (other than the + operator) to the text string. The following code takes the text string 123 and multiplies it by 1. JavaScript converts the text string “123” to the numeric value 123. testString = “123”; // text string testNumber = testString*1; // numeric value Another way of converting a text string to a numeric value is to use the following parseInt() function, which extracts the leading integer value from a text string parseInt(text) where text is the text string or variable from which the user wants to extract the leading integer value. The parseInt() function returns the integer value from the text string, discarding any non-integer characters. If a text string does not begin with an integer, the function returns the value NaN, indicating that the text string contains no accessible number. The following are some sample values returned by the parseInt() method: parseInt(“120 lbs”); // returns 120 parseInt(“120.88 lbs”); // returns 120 parseInt(“weight equals 120 lbs”); // returns NaN REFERENCES: HTML 721-722

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements True / False 1. A calendar that is created as a web table can have class and ID designations to make it easy for page

developers to assign different styles to different parts of the calendar. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 740 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.01 - Create an array NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Monthly Calendar KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 2. The appearance of any form element can be changed by modifying style sheets instead of the JavaScript code. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 740 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.01 - Create an array NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Monthly Calendar KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 3. Index values start with 1 so that the initial item in an array has an index value of 1, the second item has an

index value of 2, and so on. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

False 1 Easy HTML 742

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.01 - Create an array NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 4. In an array literal, the array values are a space-separated list within a set of curly brackets. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 742 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.01 - Create an array NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 5. The value of the length property can be reduced without removing items from an array. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 746 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 6. Increasing the value of the length property adds more items to an array, but the items have null values until Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements they are defined. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 746 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 7. By default, items are placed in an array either in the order in which they are defined or explicitly by index

number. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 748 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.01 - Create an array NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 8. The slice() method reverses the order of items in an array, making the last items first and the first items

last. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

False 1 Easy HTML 748 True / False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 9. In an if loop, a variable known as a counter variable is used to track the number of times a block of

commands is run. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 756 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.04 - Work with the for loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Program Loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 10. A command block is indicated by its opening and closing square brackets [ ]. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 757 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.04 - Work with the for loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Program Loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM Modified True / False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements 11. The do/while loop is generally used when the program loop should run at least once before testing for the

stopping condition.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 760 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.04 - Work with the for loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Program Loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 12. JavaScript supports logical operators that connect several expressions.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 760 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.05 - Write comparison and logical operators NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Comparison and Logical Operators KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 13. The every(callback [, thisArg]) array method applies the callback function to each item in an

array.

ANSWER:

False - forEach(callback [, thisArg])

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 767 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:43 AM

14. The map(callback [, thisArg]) method returns the index of the first element in the array that

passes a test in the callback function.

ANSWER: False - findIndex(callback [, thisArg]) POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 767 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 15. When each entry in an array matches the entry in another array, it is called a linear array.

ANSWER: False - parallel POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 772 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 16. The break statement runs a command or a command block only if the conditional expression returns the

value true; it does nothing if the condition is false.

ANSWER:

False - if

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 777 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.07 - Use the if statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Introducing Conditional Statements Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 4/3/2017 9:43 AM

17. The getDate() method in a calendar app returns an integer ranging from 0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday).

ANSWER: False - getDay() POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 781 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Completing the Calendar App KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 18. When a pass statement is encountered, control is passed to the statement immediately following it.

ANSWER:

False - break

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 790 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 19. The while statement is used to exit a program loop before the stopping condition is met.

ANSWER: False - break POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 790 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Managing Program Loops and Conditional Statements Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 4/3/2017 9:43 AM

20. Statement labels are used to identify statements in JavaScript code so that the statements can be

referenced elsewhere in a program.

ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 791 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Managing Program Loops and Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM Multiple Choice 21. A(n) _____ is a collection of values organized under a single name. a. index b. heap c. array d. tuple ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 741 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.01 - Create an array NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Create an array KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 22. Identify the expression used to reference array values.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements a. array() b. array[i] c. array{array1,array2,…} d. array::values ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 741 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.01 - Create an array NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 23. Which of the following determines the current size of an array? a. array(length) b. array[length] c. array.length d. array::length ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 745 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 24. Identify the output of the following code.

var x = [3, 45, 1234, 24]; x.sort(); a. 1234, 24, 3, 45 b. 3, 24, 45, 1234 c. 1234, 45, 24, 3 d. 1234, 24, 45 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 748 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 25. Numeric data can be sorted by creating a(n) _____ function that contrasts the values of two adjacent array items. a. sum b. iteration c. assert d. compare ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 748 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 26. Identify a compare function that sorts numeric values in ascending order. a. function ascending(a, b) {

return a - b; } b. function ascending(b, a) { return a; } c. function ascending(a, b) { return b - a; } d. function ascending(b, a) { Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements return b; } ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 748 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 27. Identify a compare function that sorts numeric values in descending order. a. function descending(a, b) {

return a - b; } b. function descending(b, a) { return b; } c. function descending(a, b) {

return b - a; } d. function descending(b, a) { return a; } ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 748 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 28. Identify a method that is used to create a subarray.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements a. concat() b. slice() c. assert() d. sort() ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 749 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 29. What is the output of the following code?

var x = [“a”, “b”, “c”]; x.push(“d”, “e”); x.pop(); x.pop(); a. x = [“a”, “b”, “c”] b. x = [“a”, “b”, “d”, “e”] c. x = [“d”, “e”] d. x = [“c”, “d”, “e”] ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 750 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 30. A _____, which employs the first-in-first-out (FIFO) principle in which the first item added to the data list is

the first removed, is similar to a stack. a. frame Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements b. bitmap c. queue d. binary tree ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 750 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 31. For array data that should be treated as a queue, the _____ method is used, which is similar to the pop()

method except that it removes the first array item and not the last. a. reverse() b. shift() c. assert() d. sort() ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 750 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 32. Identify a method that inserts new items at the front of an array. a. reverse() b. unshift() c. assert() d. sort() ANSWER:

b

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 750 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 33. Identify the general structure of a for loop. a. for (start;continue;update)

{ commands } b. for (start;update) { commands } c. for (start;stop) { commands } d. for (start;stop;continue) { commands } ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 756 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.04 - Work with the for loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Program Loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 34. What is the output of the following code?

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements for(var i = 5; i > 0; i--) a. i = 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 b. i = 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 c. i = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 d. i = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 758 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.04 - Work with the for loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Program Loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 35. What is the output of the following code?

for (var i = 0; i <= 360; i+=60) a. i = 0, 60, 120, 180, 240, 360 b. i = 360, 240, 180, 120, 60, 0 c. i = 60, 120, 240, 480, 960 d. i = 600, 300, 240, 180, 120, 60 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 758 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.04 - Work with the for loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Program Loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 36. Identify the syntax of the while loop. a. while (continue) {

commands } b. while (start) { Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements commands } c. while [start;stop] { commands } d. while [update;continue] { commands } ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 758 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.03 - Create a program loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Program Loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 37. The _____ loop tests the condition to continue the loop right after the latest command block is run. a. do/while b. while c. for d. forEach ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 759 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.03 - Create a program loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Program Loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 38. Identify the general syntax of the do/while loop. a. do (continue) {

commands Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements } while (continue){ commands } b. while (continue) { commands } do (continue){ commands } c. while { commands } do (continue); d. do { commands } while (continue); ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 759 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.03 - Create a program loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Program Loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 39. The _____ operator tests whether two items are equal in value and have the same data type. a. = = b. = = = c. = d. != ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 760 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.05 - Write comparison and logical operators Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Working with Program Loops Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 4/3/2017 9:43 AM

40. Which of the following examples tests whether x is equal to 5 or y is equal to 8? a. (x === 5) && (y === 8) b. (x === 5) : (y === 8) c. (x === 5) || (y === 8) d. (x === 5) / (y === 8) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 761 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.05 - Write comparison and logical operators NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Comparison and Logical Operators KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 41. Identify the general structure for accessing each value from an array using a for loop. a. for (i < array; i++) {

commands involving array[i] } b. for (var i = 0; i++; i < array.length) { commands involving array(i) } c. for (var i = 0; i++) { commands involving array(i) } d. for (var i = 0; i < array.length; i++) { commands involving array[i] } ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

d 1 Easy HTML 761 Multiple Choice

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.04 - Work with the for loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 42. Identify the general syntax of the forEach method. a. array.forEach [, thisArg]() {

commands } b. array.forEach(callback [, thisArg]) c. array.forEach (value){ commands } d. array.forEach(callback [value]) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 765 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.04 - Work with the for loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 43. What is the output of the following code?

var sum = 0; var x = [1, 3, 7, 11]; x.forEach(sumArray); function sumArray(value) { sum += value; } a. 0 b. 231 c. 11 d. 22 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 765 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.04 - Work with the for loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 44. Which of the following functions increases the value of each item in an array by 1? a. sum() b. AddArray() c. StepUp() d. ceil() ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 765 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.03 - Create a program loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 45. What is the output of the following code?

var x = [4, 7, 11]; x.forEach(stepUp); function stepUp(value, i, arr) { arr[i] = value + 1; } a. 4, 7, 11 b. 3, 7, 11 c. 5, 8, 12 d. 8, 14, 22 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 765 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.03 - Create a program loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 46. The _____ method performs an action similar to the forEach() method except that the function it calls

returns a value that can be used to match the contents of an existing array into a new array. a. sort() b. map() c. splice() d. find() ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 765 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.04 - Work with the for loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 47. Identify a method that extracts array items that match a specified condition. a. sort() b. filter() c. splice() d. reverse() ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

b 1 Easy HTML 766 Multiple Choice

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 48. What is the output of the following code?

var scores = [92, 68, 83, 95, 91, 65, 77]; var highScores = scores.filter(gradeA); function gradeA(value) { return value > 90; } a. [92, 95, 91] b. [96, 97, 98] c. [68, 83, 65, 77] d. [91, 92, 65, 68, 77, 83] ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 766 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 49. Identify a method that tests whether the condition returned by the callback function holds for all items in

an array. a. array.every(callback [, thisArg]) b. array.filter(callback [, thisArg]) c. array.some(callback [, thisArg]) d. array.find(callback [, thisArg]) ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

a 1 Moderate HTML 767

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 50. Which of the following methods creates a new array populated with the elements of array that return a

value of true from the callback function? a. array.every(callback [, thisArg]) b. array.filter(callback [, thisArg]) c. array.some(callback [, thisArg]) d. array.find(callback [, thisArg]) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 767 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 51. The _____ method creates a new array by passing the original array items to the callback function, which

returns the equivalent value of the array items. a. array.every(callback [, thisArg]) b. array.map(callback [, thisArg]) c. array.some(callback [, thisArg]) d. array.find(callback [, thisArg]) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 767 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Program Loops and Arrays Bloom’s: Remember 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 4/3/2017 9:43 AM

52. Identify a method that decreases array by keeping only those items that return a value of true from the

callback function. a. array.every(callback [, thisArg]) b. array.map(callback [, thisArg]) c. array.reduce(callback [, thisArg]) d. array.find(callback [, thisArg]) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 767 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 53. The _____ method diminishes array from the last element by keeping only those items that return a value

of true from the callback function. a. array.every(callback [, thisArg]) b. array.map(callback [, thisArg]) c. array.reduceRight(callback [, thisArg]) d. array.findIndex(callback [, thisArg]) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 767 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:43 AM

54. Identify a true statement of array.some(callback [, thisArg]) method. a. It tests whether the condition returned by the callback function holds for at least one item in

array. b. It returns the value of the first element in the array that passes a test in the callback function. c. It tests whether the condition returned by the callback function holds for all items in array. d. It returns the index of the first element in the array that passes a test in the callback function.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 767 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 55. Identify a true statement of array.find(callback [, thisArg]) method. a. It tests whether the condition returned by the callback function holds for at least one item in

array. b. It returns the value of the first element in the array that passes a test in the callback function. c. It tests whether the condition returned by the callback function holds for all items in array. d. It returns the index of the first element in the array that passes a test in the callback function.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 767 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Program Loops and Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 56. Identify the structure of an if statement Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements a. if (condition) {

commands } b. if { }(condition) c. if { commands } d. if { } (condition){ commands ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 773 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.07 - Use the if statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 57. Which of the following values will the expression 15 % 4 return? a. 1 b. 11 c. 3 d. 60 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 774 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.07 - Use the if statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements 58. Identify the expression in which the initial value of the day variable will be set to match the first day of the

calendar month. a. var day = Date(calDate(), calDate.getDay(), 1); b. var day = new Day(calDate.getDD(), calDate.getMM(),calDate.getYY(),1); c. var day = new Day(calDay.getFullMonth(), calDay.getDate(), 1); d. var day = new Date(calDate.getFullYear(), calDate.getMonth(), 1); ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 781 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Completing the Calendar App KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 59. Which of the following methods is used to determine the day of the week on which a month starts? a. calDay; b. day.calDay() c. find.Day; d. getDay() ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 781 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Completing the Calendar App KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 60. Which of the following statements is used to terminate any program loop or conditional statement? a. for b. while c. pass Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements d. break ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 790 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Managing Program Loops and Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 61. The _____ statement stops processing the commands in the current iteration of the loop and proceeds to the

next iteration instead of stopping the program loop altogether. a. switch b. else c. continue d. pass ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 790 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Managing Program Loops and Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 62. Identify the syntax of the statement label. a. label = {statements} b. statement!(label) c. label: statements d. statements.label ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

c 1 Easy HTML 791

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Managing Program Loops and Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 9-1 Melissa, a computer science engineering student, is learning the basics of programming by exploring arrays.

She learns about different array methods. She wishes to learn more on inserting and deleting array items. She creates monthName array to extract only the three spring months—March, April, and May—from a calendar.

63. Melissa wants to extract the spring months and store them in the monthName array. Identify a method

Melissa should choose to perform this task. a. springMonths = monthName.slice(2, 5); b. springMonths = monthName.splice(2, 3); c. springMonths = monthName.slice(3, 5); d. springMonths = monthName.splice(5, 3); ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 749 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CT Case 9-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 64. Melissa wants to remove spring months from the monthName array. Which of the following methods should

Melissa use? a. springMonths = monthName.slice(2, 5); b. springMonths = monthName.splice(2, 3); c. springMonths = monthName.slice(3, 5); d. springMonths = monthName.splice(5, 3); ANSWER:

b

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 750 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CT Case 9-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 65. Melissa wants to insert abbreviations of spring months into the monthName array. Which of the following

methods should she use? a. monthName.reverse(5, 3, “Mar”, “Apr”, “May”); b. monthName.sort(2, 3, “Mar”, “Apr”, “May”); c. monthName.join(5, 3, “Mar”, “Apr”, “May”); d. monthName.splice(2, 3, “Mar”, “Apr”, “May”); ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 750 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CT Case 9-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 9-2 Gregor, a software developer, is developing a calendar application. He has to use several if conditional statements to ensure that the calendar displays the exact number of days present in each month of each year. He creates a dayCount array to keep track of the number of days in each month.

66. Gregor wants to ensure February contains 29 days only in the year 2020 as it is a leap year. Which of the

following should Gregor use to set the value in the dayCount array? a. if (thisYear === 2020) { Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements dayCount[1] = 29; } b. if (dayCount=29) { 2020; } c. if { thisYear = 2020; dayCount[1] == 29; } d. if { dayCount=29 && this year=2020; } ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 773 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CT Case 9-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 67. Gregor wants to create a condition to ensure that all the years divisible by 4 should contain 29 days in

February. Which of the following statements should he use? a. if (thisYear % 4 === 0) { dayCount[1] = 29; } b. if (this year/4 === 0) { dayCount[2] = 29; } c. if (this year*4==0) { dayCount[1] = 29 } d. if (thisYear % 4 <= 29) { dayCount[2] = 29; } ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

a 1 Challenging

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements REFERENCES: HTML 774 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CT Case 9-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM Completion 68. _________ is a number associated with each individual value in an array and distinguishes each value from

other values in the array.

ANSWER:

Index

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 741 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.01 - Create an array NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 69. JavaScript allows for the creation of _________, in which some array values are undefined.

ANSWER: sparse arrays POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 745 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.01 - Create an array NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 70. _________ is a section of an array.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements ANSWER:

Subarray

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 749 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.01 - Create an array NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 71. Arrays can be used to store information in a data structure known as a _________ in which new items are

added to the top or to the end of the array.

ANSWER: stack POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 750 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 72. A stack data structure employs the _________ principle in which the last items added to the stack are the

first ones removed.

ANSWER:

last-in first-out (LIFO)

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 750 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements 73. A _________ is a set of commands executed repeatedly until a stopping condition is met.

ANSWER: program loop POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 756 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.03 - Create a program loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Program Loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 74. The collection of commands that is run each time through a loop is known collectively as a _________.

ANSWER: command block POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 757 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.03 - Create a program loop NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with program loops KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 75. A _________ is an operator that compares the value of one expression to another returning a Boolean value

indicating whether the comparison is true or not.

ANSWER: comparison operator POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 760 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.05 - Write comparison and logical operators NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Comparison and Logical Operators KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements DATE MODIFIED:

4/3/2017 9:43 AM

76. A _________ is a statement that runs a command or command block only when certain circumstances are

met.

ANSWER:

conditional statement

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 773 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 77. The _________ returns the integer remainder after dividing one integer by another.

ANSWER: modulus operator POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 774 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.06 - Create a conditional statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Conditional Statements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM Matching Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. array.unshift(values) b. array.toString() c. pop() d. concat(array1, array2,...) e. sort() g. join(separator)

f. copyWithin(target, start[, end]) h. shift()

i. reverse() DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

j. push(values

QUESTION TYPE:

Easy HTML 748 HTML 752 Matching

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 78. This method removes the last item from an array.

ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 79. This method appends an array with new items.

ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 80. This method inverts the order of items in an array.

ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 81. This method removes the first item from an array.

ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 82. This method inserts new items at the start of an array.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 83. This method converts the contents of an array to a text sequence with the array values in a comma-separated

list.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 84. This method duplicates items within an array.

ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 85. This method links all items in the array into a single text string.

ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 86. This method joins the array to two or more arrays, creating a single array containing the items from all the

arrays.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements 87. This method rearranges array items in alphabetical order.

ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 Essay 88. Explain the length property of an array with examples.

ANSWER: A JavaScript array automatically expands in length as more items are added. To

determine the array’s current size, apply the following length property array.length where array is the name of the array. The value returned by the length property is equal to one more than the highest index number in the array (because array indices start at 0 rather than 1), so, if the highest number in the index is 11, then the value returned would be 12.

JavaScript allows for the creation of sparse arrays, in which some array values are undefined. As a result, the length value is not always the same as the number of array values. For example, the following commands create a sparse array in which only the first and last items have defined values: var x = new Array(); x[0] = “Lewis”; x[99] = “80517”; The value of the length property for this array is 100 even though it only contains two values. Sparse arrays occur frequently in database applications involving customer records where items such as mobile phone numbers or postal codes have not been entered for every person.

It must be noted that the value of the length property cannot be reduced without removing items from the end of the array. For example, the following command would reduce the monthName array to the first three months—January, February, and March: monthName.length = 3; Increasing the value of the length property adds more items to an array, but the items have null values until they are defined.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 745-746 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Introducing Arrays Bloom’s: Understand 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 4/3/2017 9:43 AM

89. Briefly explain the process of using arrays as data stacks.

ANSWER: Arrays can be used to store information in a data structure known as a stack in which

new items are added to the top of the stack—or to the end of the array—much like a person clearing a dinner table adds dishes to the top of a stack of dirty plates. A stack data structure employs the last-in first-out (LIFO) principle in which the last items added to the stack are the first ones removed. Stack data structures are encountered when using the Undo feature of some software applications, in which the last command a user performed is the first command that is undone.

JavaScript supports several methods to allow a user to work with a stack of array items. For example, the push() method appends new items to the end of an array. It has the syntax array.push(values) where values is a comma-separated list of values to be appended to the end of the array. To remove—or unstack—the last item, the pop() method is used, as follows: array.pop() The following set of commands demonstrates how to use the push() and pop() methods to employ the LIFO principle by adding and then removing items from a data stack: var x = [“a”, “b”, “c”]; x.push(“d”, “e”); // x = [“a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”] x.pop(); // x = [“a”, “b”, “c”, “d”] x.pop(); // x = [“a”, “b”, “c”] In this code, the push() method adds two items to the end of the array, and then the pop() method removes those last items one at a time.

A queue, which employs the first-in-first-out (FIFO) principle in which the first item added to the data list is the first removed, is similar to a stack. An example of the FIFO principle in action is a line of people waiting to be served. For array data that should be treated as a queue, the shift() method is used, which is similar to the pop()method except that it removes the first array item, not the last item.

JavaScript also supports the unshift() method, which inserts new items at the front of the array.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Moderate HTML 750 Essay

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.02 - Work with array properties and methods NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM 90. Describe the structure of the if else statement.

ANSWER: The if statement runs a command or a command block only if the conditional

expression returns the value true; it does nothing if the condition is false. On some occasions, a user might want to choose between alternate command blocks so that one command block is run if the conditional expression is true, and a different command block is run if the expression is false. The general structure of an if else statement follows: if (condition) { commands if condition is true } else { commands if condition is false } If only a single command is run in response to the if statement, one can use the following abbreviated form: if (condition) command if condition is true else command if condition is false; The following example shows an if else statement that displays two possible alert boxes depending on whether the value of the day variable is Friday or not: if (day === “Friday”) alert(“Thank goodness it’s Friday”) else alert(“Today is “ + day); Like if statements, if else statements can be nested as in the following code, which chooses between three possible alert boxes: if (day === “Friday”) alert(“Thank goodness it’s Friday”) else { if (day === “Monday”) alert(“Blue Monday”) else alert(“Today is “ + day); } Some programmers advocate always using curly braces even if the command block contains only a single command. This practice visually separates one else clause from another. Also, when reading through nested statements, it can be helpful to remember that an else clause usually pairs with the nearest preceding if statement.

POINTS:

1

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 10: Exploring Arrays, Loops, and Conditional Statements DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 777-778 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 10.07 - Use the if statement NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Arrays KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 4/3/2017 9:43 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles True / False 1. The commands that a browser runs in response to an event is a script. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 815 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 7:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 7:59 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPNG QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMB-CWAG-CPBUGBOU-NA5R-CASU-EPMN-CRSU-GAT3-GOSU-EPUF-GCSU-RP33-8YAG-RATSE7JI-YT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 2. When a user copies the content of an element in a browser window, the oncut event handler is used. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 816 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 7:59 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:00 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPNR QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-CE5U-CPTW-8BTGEPBO-8YSU-13BA-8RSU-RA5N-GOSU-N3JS-GASU-ECMF-GPTD-YP5B-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles 3. The event object contains properties and methods associated with an event. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 819 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:02 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:02 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPND QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMF-8FTD-OCUD-8R3DQ3MR-GYSS-GQJ1-CRSU-E3UF-GOSS-KC3U-GYSS-EPMD-GC4U-YA5N-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 4. The evt.eventPhase returns the object that is currently experiencing the event. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 819 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:05 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPB1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJT-C3UD-GC5G-GAHSKP3T-CESU-YP5N-8YSU-YCJA-GOSU-1QJS-CCSS-GPT3-CJTU-CPJ1-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 5. The evt.target returns the object in which the event was initiated.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 819 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:07 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPBZ QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJW-CWHU-OQJ1-G3UGG3TA-8RSS-RAUF-8RSU-NCBS-GOSS-EA3T-COSU-YPTZ-GYHG-GP3S-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 6. All JavaScript properties must begin with an uppercase letter. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 823 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Object Properties KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:13 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPBI QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMR-GR5D-GC3S-CP1DNCUN-CCSS-KQB1-CRSS-GPUG-GOSU-EPT3-CRSU-NPTO-GF1D-RP3I-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 7. JavaScript does not support hyphens in property names. a. True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 823 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.02 - Reference an attribute from a page element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Object Properties KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:19 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPKN QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJI-CAAD-KPBZ-CPTDN3DF-CCSU-EA3T-8RSS-R3TW-GOSU-QPMB-GWSU-Q3TT-GFOU-GAJI-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 8. The mouseout event indicates the movement of a mouse pointer onto an element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 832 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:22 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:22 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPJ3 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMR-GPTU-OC5F-CP1UNQBA-CCSU-QCJZ-CRSU-CPUN-GOSU-GPUR-GRSU-YQJO-CF1D-K3JS-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 9. The dblclick event indicates that the mouse button has been double-clicked. a. True b. False ANSWER: True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 832 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:24 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:24 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPJA QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJO-GYHG-KCJA-GY3D1PTI-CWSU-OQJA-CRSU-1CUB-GOSU-OAJW-8YSU-NPBO-CTTD-NCB1-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 10. During a mouse action, events cannot be fired more than once. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 832 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:26 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:27 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPKG QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJU-8BOU-1ATA-CA5DGCTU-COSU-G3B3-8RSU-C3JA-GOSU-13DF-CESS-KPBW-GBTD-YCDG-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 11. The evt.pageY property returns the vertical coordinate (in pixels) of the mouse pointer relative to the

document. a. True b. False ANSWER:

True

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 833 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:29 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:29 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPKF QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMR-8F1U-NPBO-C3TSEA3I-8RSU-OP3O-CRSS-NQJT-GOSU-C3UF-CESS-RCJZ-8FTU-GPMD-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 12. The event model describes how events and objects interact within a web page and a web browser. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 836 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:31 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:32 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPKR QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GO5U-1QBZ-GR3SG3BI-8YSU-GCUD-8RSU-C3DB-GOSS-NATT-GHSU-ECUB-CC4D-R3J3-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 13. The onclick event handler recognizes the propagation of events through the capture and bubbling phases. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 837 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:44 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPKD QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJO-GOHD-CA3S-CJUGR3MG-8YSU-GATS-8YSU-N3TT-GOSS-NATS-GYSU-RCDR-CC3D-GQJO-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 14. A limitation of an event handler is that only one function can be applied to it at a time. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 837 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:47 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPJ1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJI-8YHS-RQJI-CIUDNQJT-GOSU-OCTT-CESU-CCMG-GOSU-RQJZ-CRSS-EQMF-GEHD-QCTI-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 15. The keypress event is fired in response to the computer generating a character. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles REFERENCES: HTML 843 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:49 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:50 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPJT QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ1-CTUD-Y3TW-CC3GECUD-GRSU-RC3W-CESU-KQJZ-GOSU-1PT3-8RSU-CQDG-CA5G-GCUB-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 16. The event property evt.key returns the text of the key used in the event. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 844 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:52 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPJO QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJT-GRHD-QPJT-G7UGR3UR-8YSU-KCBI-8YSU-O3T1-GOSU-1PDD-CWSS-GCUG-CAAU-QAT3-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 17. A generic cursor should be listed first and custom cursors should be listed last so that a browser can display

something if it is unable to support a custom cursor image. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

False 1 Easy

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles REFERENCES: HTML 848 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Changing the Cursor Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:55 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPJS QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJS-CEAU-OC5G-GRADKPTI-GHSU-OQJA-CRSS-ECMB-GOSU-ECJW-GOSS-NATU-GBOU-OP3Z-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 18. Function operators are more flexible than function declarations, allowing a function to be placed anywhere a

variable can be placed. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 856 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.07 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Functions as Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:57 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 8:57 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPJI QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJU-CE4D-KC3O-GR3DGPDR-CWSU-1CMN-CRSU-GPB1-GOSS-CPJO-CASS-KCMR-GPTG-RA5R-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 19. Named functions are more concise and easier to manage than anonymous functions. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles REFERENCES: HTML 857 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.07 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Functions as Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 8:59 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 9:00 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPJW QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJI-CAAD-1AJI-CO5U1QBZ-CASU-NC5R-8RSU-OCB1-GOSU-QATZ-GYSU-1C31-GR3D-GPBA-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 20. Good coding practice dictates that global variables must be used as much as possible in a program. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 859 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.07 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Functions as Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 9:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 9:04 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-KOKN QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJA-GR5S-E3T1-GC3DGPBI-8YSU-R3TU-8RSU-GCUG-GOSU-KQBO-GESU-GPJT-GJTU-E3DD-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE Multiple Choice 21. Which of the following provides the correct syntax for adding an event handler to a page element as an

HTML attribute? a. <element onevent = “script”> b. <element = “script”> c. <element = “onevent”> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles d. <element script = “onevent”;> ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 815 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 6:30 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 6:32 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPTT QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMD-CFUG-NPDG-G31DQPT3-CCSU-NA3T-8YSS-E3DG-GOSU-NC5D-8RSU-NP3I-CR5U-KP5N-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 22. The _____ event handler is applied to a page when it is about to be unloaded by the browser. a. onunload b. onload c. onbeforeunload d. onbeforeload ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 816 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 6:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 6:40 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPTO QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ3-GCHS-NCJI-GBOSGA3I-8RSS-NPJW-CRSU-RCUR-GOSS-KCUN-8RSU-YCTO-CA4D-EA33-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 23. Which of the following event properties or methods returns a Boolean value that indicates whether an event can have Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles its default action terminated? a. evt.stopImmediatePropagation() b. evt.stopPropogation() c. evt.cancelable d. evt.defaultPrevented ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 819 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using the Event Object KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 6:45 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:04 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPTS QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GC3G-RCUNGOHD-K3JT-GWSU-KPBO-CESS-KPDG-GOSU-KCT3-CASU-YCDN-GCHSNC3W-E7JI-YT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 24. Identify a true statement about the evt.eventPhase property. a. It returns the object currently experiencing the event. b. It returns a Boolean value indicating whether the event is trusted by the browser. c. It returns the type of event. d. It returns the stage of the event propagation the event object is currently at.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 819 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using the Event Object KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 6:50 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 6:58 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EP3U QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4NCopyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles 4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ1-CP1D-E3DB-G7TURCTZ-GRSU-QP3S-8RSU-RQBO-GOSU-EPUR-CWSS-NCUN-8FTD-O3DD-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 25. The _____ object property references the browser window in which the event has occurred. a. evt.target b. evt.view c. evt.currentTarget d. evt.eventphase ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 819 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using the Event Object KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 7:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:06 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EP3O QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJS-GEAU-1C3W-8Y3UKATT-CRSU-1QJA-CESU-RAUF-GOSS-EPJZ-GYSU-YQJZ-GOAU-NPMF-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 26. In the evt.eventPhase property, identify the phase of the event propagation the object is currently at

when its value is 2. a. NONE b. CAPTURING_PHASE c. AT_TARGET d. BUBBLING_PHASE ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 819 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using the Event Object KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 7:30 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:06 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EP3Z QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJT-8BOU-GPUD-CWHURPTW-CCSU-EPTS-CRSS-NCDN-GOSU-EPMN-CASS-GAJ1-8F1G-G3DR-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 27. The _____ event property returns a Boolean value that indicates whether the browser depends upon the

event. a. evt.type b. evt.target c. evt.isTrusted d. evt.eventPhase ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 819 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using the Event Object KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 7:33 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 7:34 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EP3S QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJI-GTTD-1CT3-CF1GGCJU-GHSS-KATS-8YSU-EQDN-GOSU-EPDR-8RSS-ECUD-8FTD-GPDG-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 28. Which of the following event object methods prevents other event listeners of the event from being called? a. evt.stopImmediatePropagation() b. evt.stopPropagation() c. evt.preventDefault() d. evt.cancelable() ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

a 1 Easy HTML 819 Multiple Choice False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using the Event Object KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 7:37 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 7:38 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EP3I QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMF-GCHG-KQB3-CPOUOATO-GOSS-NPJO-CRSS-RQBS-GOSU-CAUF-CESS-NCJO-CC3G-NCUG-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 29. Which of the following JavaScript expressions is equivalent to the given HTML code?

<div id=”menu1” class=”menu”> a. document.getElementById(“menu1”).className = “menu”; b. document.getElementById(“menu1”).“menu”; c. Document.getelementbyId(menu1= “class name”.menu); d. Document.getelementbyId(“menu1”).menu= “class”; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 824 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.02 - Reference an attribute from a page element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Object Properties KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 7:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 7:42 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EP3W QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJW-G3TG-KQDBGW5G-EATZ-GWSS-G3JA-8RSU-GPJ3-GOSU-QAJW-8YSS-KATS-GW3D-RA5BE7JI-YT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 30. Which of the following is the correct syntax for a command in JavaScript to apply inline styles using the

following style attribute? <element style = “property:value”>… a. object.style = property:value b. object.property = style.value Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles c. object.style.property = “value”; d. object:style:property = “value”; ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 824 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.03 - Change the inline style of a page element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Object Properties KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 7:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 7:45 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-EPNN QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GA5G-CP3T-CAAGRPTA-CRSU-EQDF-CRSS-EPJO-GOSU-YQBU-GCSS-K3DF-8BTU-EP31-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 31. Which of the following JavaScript methods is used to define an object collection based on a CSS (Cascading

Style Sheets) selector? a. document.querySelectorAll(selector) b. document.getElementbyId(selector) c. object.style.property = “value(selector)” d. object.property = “value(selector)” ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 826 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.03 - Change the inline style of a page element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Object Properties KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 9:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/15/2017 1:43 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-KOJ3 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMD-CRHS-KCUB-CR5UEA5G-8RSU-OPTZ-8YSU-13JO-GOSU-E3DG-CCSU-1AJU-CPTU-QA33-E7JICopyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles YT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 32. The _____ element is continuously fired as the mouse pointer hovers across an element with each new

position registering that event. a. mousemove b. mouseover c. mouseout d. mouseleave ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 832 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 9:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/9/2017 9:17 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-KOJA QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJW-CA3U-QP33-GY5UNPJU-CRSS-KCMD-8YSS-GCBI-GOSU-OPDF-8YSU-YQJO-GA3D-GPMR-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 33. Which of the following mouse buttons is pressed if the value of the evt.buttons property is 2? a. the left mouse button b. the right mouse button c. the middle mouse button d. the back mouse button ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 833 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/9/2017 9:19 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:07 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3BU-KOKG QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GITU-13J3-GF1GCPB3-GHSS-KPBT-8RSU-YQBO-GOSU-N3UB-GWSS-R3DB-8YAD-GAUG-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 34. Which of the following mouse event properties returns the vertical coordinate (in pixels) of the mouse

pointer relative to the browser window? a. evt.clientY b. evt.pageY c. evt.screeenY d. evt.whichY ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 833 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 1:33 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 1:35 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC4G QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJW-8RAS-KQDGGWAD-GCJU-CWSU-OPMB-8YSS-NC5F-GOSU-E3MR-GHSU-EC3I-CCAU-OPB3E7JI-YT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 35. The _____ is a mouse event object property that references the secondary object, where for the mouseover

event, it is the element that the pointer is leaving and for the mouseout event it is the element that the pointer is entering. a. evt.which b. evt.detail c. evt.relatedTarget d. evt.button ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

c 1 Easy HTML 833 Multiple Choice

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 1:37 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/15/2017 1:45 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC4F QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJO-8BTS-GAUB-CW5DKA3U-GYSS-EP5G-CRSS-RP33-GOSU-1AMG-CRSU-E3JU-8YHU-QPTO-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 36. Which of the following statements is true about the evt.screenX mouse event? a. It returns the horizontal coordinate (in pixels) of the mouse pointer relative to the browser window. b. It returns the horizontal coordinate (in pixels) of the mouse pointer relative to

the physical screen. c. It returns the horizontal coordinate (in pixels) of the secondary target of the event. d. It returns the horizontal coordinate (in pixels) of the last mouse click relative to the screen ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 833 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 1:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 1:44 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC4R QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMR-CC5G-RC33-GI1SRCUG-GESU-E3MF-CRSU-KATW-GOSS-RCDR-GOSS-GCUF-CJUD-Q3DD-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 37. Identify the mouse event property that returns an integer indicating the mouse button that was pressed,

where 0 = none, 1 = left, 2 = wheel or middle, and 3 = right. a. evt.which b. evt.button c. evt.buttons d. evt.detail Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 833 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 11.04 - Describe a domain name TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 1:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 1:47 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC4D QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJT-CO5S-CCJ3-GT1GRCB3-GOSS-CCUR-8RSU-QCDF-GOSU-QPUN-8RSU-1QBS-C3UD-QA5R-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 38. Which of following codes of an event handler records the exact window position of the mouse pointer as

it maneuvers across an element? a. document.getElementById(“element1”).onmouseenter = trackPointer; function trackPointer(e) { var hPos = e.clientX; document.getElementById(“element2”).innerText; b. document.getElementById(“element1”).onmouseclick = trackPointer; function trackPointer(e) { var vPos = e.clientY; document.getElementById(“element2”).innerText = “ (“ + hPos + “, “ + vPos + “)”; } c. document.getElementById(“element1”).onmousemove = trackPointer; function trackPointer(e) { var hPos = e.clientX; var vPos = e.clientY; document.getElementById(“element2”).innerText = “ (“ + hPos + “, “ + vPos + “)”; } d. document.getElementById(“element1”).onmouseup = trackPointer; function trackPointer(e) { var hPos = e.clientX; document.getElementById(“element2”).innerText = “ (“ + hPos + “, “ + vPos + “)”; } Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 833 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 1:49 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/15/2017 1:46 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC3U QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJS-GITU-OPTU-GE3GGPMN-CASS-GCB3-8RSU-13UG-GOSU-NCDN-GHSU-GPJ1-GTOS-RCJI-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 39. In the _____ phase, the event moves down the object hierarchy, starting from the root element and moving

inward until it reaches the object that initiated the event. a. capture b. target c. bubbling d. analyse ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 836 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 1:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 1:56 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC31 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJW-8FTS-RP3W-CJTSGQMD-GYSU-EPUR-CRSU-NA5N-GOSS-CP3U-CWSU-1A3T-8R4S-RCBW-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 40. Identify the event handler that does not recognize the propagation of the events through capture and Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles

bubbling phases. a. onmouseout b. onmouseleave c. onmouseenter d. onmousedown ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 837 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 2:00 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 2:02 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC3T QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ1-GW5S-GCBI-GPTSCATT-CESU-KAJW-CESS-CA3Z-GOSS-RCJS-GRSU-1AJW-G31D-YAMN-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 41. Identify the syntax to add an event listener to an object. a. object.addEventListener(event, function [, capture = true]); b. object.addEventListener(event, function [, capture = false]); c. object.addEventListener(event, function [,target= false]); d. object.addEventListener(event, function [, target = true]); ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 837 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 2:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 3:47 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC3O QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4NCopyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles 4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMD-GY3U-1QBS-CO5URCBS-CASU-QAUD-8RSU-YP3T-GOSU-NAJT-CRSU-NAT1-8YAS-R3JA-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 42. Which of the following is a true statement about an event listener? a. It describes how events and objects

interact within a web page and a web browser. b. It allows a function to override another when multiple functions are added. c. It permits only one function to be applied to an event listener at a time. d. It responds to events during the target phase but does not recognize the propagation of events through the capture and bubbling phases.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 838 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 3:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/15/2017 1:47 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC3Z QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJO-GEAU-EC3S-CEHDNA33-CRSS-NAJA-8RSS-N3TI-GOSU-Q3TW-CASU-NCUN-GE4D-EQB3-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 43. Identify the syntax to remove an event listener. a. object.removeEventListener(event, function [, capture = false]); b. object.removeEventListener(event, function [, capture = true]); c. object.removeEventListener(event, function [, bubbling = false]); d. object.removeEventListener(event, function [,bubbling= false]); ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 839 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 3:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 3:55 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC3S QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ3-CPTU-EPBO-CE5DK3TA-CCSU-NCDF-CRSU-OCJU-GOSS-KC3I-GESS-EC3Z-CIOU-YCJZ-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 44. Identify the correct syntax to keep the first submit button from submitting the web form when clicked. a. var sButton = document.querySelector("input[type='submit']"); sButton.onclick = function(e) { e.preventDefault(); } b. var sButton = document.querySelector("input[type='submit']"); sButton.onclick = function(e) { e.stopPropagation(); } c. var sButton = document.querySelector("input[type='submit']"); sButton.onclick = function(e) { return true; } d. var sButton = document.querySelector("input[type='submit']"); sButton.onclick = function(e) { e.cancelable = true; } ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 842 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 3:57 AM DATE MODIFIED: 7/13/2021 3:32 PM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC3I QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJW-CJOS-RA5G-CC3GR3JU-CRSU-YPUF-CESS-K3MR-GOSU-EPJ1-GYSS-EPBW-GTOU-OPTW-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 45. Identify the sequence of the occurrence of events when a user types a keyboard key. a. keyup,keypress,keydown Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles b. keydown,keypress,keyup c. keyup,keydown,keypress d. keydown,keyup,keypress ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 843 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 4:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 4:02 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KC3W QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ3-CR3U-E3DR-CCHDEPDN-8YSS-GATW-CESS-NPBI-GOSS-GCTI-CWSS-RATZ-GHHU-E3BA-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 46. Which of the following keyboard event properties returns the text of the key used in the event? a. evt.altKey b. evt.metaKey c. evt.shiftKey d. evt.key ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 844 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 4:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 4:05 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KCNN QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJA-GAHU-RC3S-GEAGKCT1-GCSS-RPJ3-8RSS-GCMN-GOSS-KQBO-GWSU-RA3Z-GE5G-CQBO-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles 47. Identify a true statement about the evt.charCode keyboard event property. a. It returns the text of the key used in the event. b. It returns a Unicode character indicating whether the Alt key was used in the event object c. It returns a Boolean value indicating whether the meta key was used in the event d. It returns the Unicode character code of the key used in the keypress event.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 844 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 4:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:11 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KCNB QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMN-GBTU-GCBWCPTD-YP3O-GHSS-EAMF-8YSU-O3MG-GOSS-NA5D-COSU-KCDB-GPTD-NCJOE7JI-YT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 48. Which of the following is the correct location of a key on a keyboard if the value of the keyboard property

evt.location is 3? a. The key is located in the standard position. b. The key is located on the keyboard’s left edge. c. The key is located on the keyboard’s right edge. d. The key is located on the numeric pad.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 844 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 4:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 4:12 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KCB3 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMR-GPTU-CQBI-G31GRCTT-CCSU-YP5D-CESU-OPBA-GOSU-O3JZ-GOSS-RCBA-CC4G-KCJZ-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 49. Which of the following keyboard event properties returns a Boolean value indicating whether a specific key

was used in an event? a. evt.key b. evt.metaKey c. evt.keyCode d. evt.charCode ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 844 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 4:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:12 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KCBA QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJT-CO4G-N3UG-CE3GRA3A-CASS-KP33-8YSU-O3BS-GOSU-CCTS-8RSU-QPDF-GOHS-KPDR-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 50. Which of the following is the correct value of the charCode property for the keys “a, z” when the keyup

and keydown events occur? a. 65, 90 b. 97, 105 c. 49, 57 d. 0, 0 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 845 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 5:31 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 5:33 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPNN QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJT-G31D-KPB1-G31UYQB1-8RSU-RP3T-CESS-GPT1-GOSU-RAJT-GRSS-E3TS-GJTD-YPTW-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 51. The keyCode values for the keys “1, 9” on the numeric pad when the keypress event occurs is _____. a. 49, 57 b. 97, 105 c. 65, 90 d. 97, 122 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 845 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 5:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 5:37 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPNB QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ3-CW4U-GA5D-CFUDKA3Z-CESU-QCTW-CRSS-C3MR-GOSS-GPJO-CASU-YCJW-8R4S-C3JS-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 52. Identify the correct charCode values for the keys “1, 9” on the top row of the keyboard when the keyup

and keydown events occur. a. 0, 0 b. 49, 57 c. 65, 90 d. 97, 122 ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

a 1 Easy

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles REFERENCES: HTML 845 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 5:39 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/15/2017 1:48 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPB3 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMF-GYHS-G3BO-CTOUCA5F-GESS-KCBT-8RSS-KAJ1-GOSS-EAJ3-CRSU-KQJA-GRHS-EQDR-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 53. Identify the keyCode values of the modifier keys when the keyup and keydown events occur. a. 16, 17, 18, 91 b. 37, 38, 39, 40 c. 0, 0, 0, 0 d. 65, 90, 97, 122 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 845 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 5:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 5:45 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPBA QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJZ-GAAD-OC5B-CJOUKA5R-8RSS-CPTI-CESU-QPJU-GOSU-KQJO-CWSU-CA3W-8RHU-RCDG-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 54. Which of the following are the charCode values for the cursor control keys when the keydown and

keyup events occur? a. 16, 17, 18, 19 b. 65, 90, 97, 122 c. 0, 0, 0, 0 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles d. 16, 17, 18, 91 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 845 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 5:48 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 5:50 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPNG QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ1-CE5U-1QBT-8R5GCQBA-GOSS-GCMD-CRSU-1P5G-GOSS-EP3Z-GHSS-RQDN-G7TS-CQMN-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 55. Which of the following is the syntax to define a cursor in JavaScript? a. object.cursorTypes = cursor.style; b. object.style = cursorTypes; c. object.style.cursor = cursorTypes; d. object.style.cursorTypes = cursor; ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 847 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.06 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Changing the Cursor Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 7:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 7:02 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPBU QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GFUD-KAJO-GJ1GKP3I-GESS-RCJZ-8RSS-RCBS-GOSU-NAJI-CCSS-NAMG-8F1D-GPBA-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 56. John has created an object called Pines. He wants to change the cursor type to the pointer cursor. Which Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles

of the following syntaxes must John use to accomplish this? a. document.getElementById(“Pines”).style.cursor = “pointer”; b. document.queryselector(“Pines”).cursor.style = “pointer”; c. document.queryselector(“Pines”).style = “pointer”; d. document.getElementById (“Pines”).cursor = “pointer”; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 848 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.06 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Changing the Cursor Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 7:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 7:06 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPB1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJO-GHHD-GQBT-GYHUQ3JT-CASS-RPDF-CESS-KCDD-GOSS-E3JS-GRSU-GPUG-GYHS-KA5R-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 57. Which of the following browsers supports cursors only in CUR and ANI formats? a. Microsoft Edge b. Google Chrome c. Mozilla Firefox d. Opera Mini ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 848 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.06 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Changing the Cursor Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 7:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 7:10 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPBT QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4NCopyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles 4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJA-8B1D-YQJI-CA5DY3BT-GYSU-NQJ1-8YSU-K3UG-GOSS-RPTA-CWSU-RCTO-GH5S-KPJI-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 58. Identify a true statement about a function in JavaScript. a. A function can be stored as a variable. b. An object is passed through a function using the pass by value method. c. A special function exists for multithreading in JavaScript. d. An object is passed through a function using pass by reference method.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 856 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.07 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with functions as objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 7:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 7:14 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPBZ QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-CO4D-KAMGCEAU-KCBO-GCSS-KC3S-CRSU-GC3Z-GOSU-QQBA-GWSU-NQJ3-GEAGGPMB-E7JI-YT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 59. William wants to create a dialog box in his website to display the message “My name is William”. Which of

the following syntaxes must William use to display the message? a. alert(“My name is William”) b. confirm(“My name is William”) c. prompt(“My name is William”) d. print(“My name is William”) ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 866 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.08 - Work with alert, confirm, and prompt dialog boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Displaying Dialog Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 7:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 7:17 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPKN QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJU-CWHD-NP3O-CCHDQ3BT-CESS-NQBT-8YSS-RPB3-GOSS-CATO-GHSU-OQBW-8RHU-O3J3-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 60. Which of the following syntaxes displays a dialog box, causing the user to enter input text? a. alert(text[,defaultInput]) b. confirm(text[,defaultInput]) c. prompt(text[,defaultInput]) d. print(text[,defaultInput]) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 866 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.08 - Work with alert, confirm, and prompt dialog boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Displaying Dialog Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 7:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 7:22 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPJA QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJZ-8RAG-KQBZ-GBTDQ3UG-CESS-KCMD-8RSS-EPJ3-GOSS-RPJI-CCSS-R3JZ-COAD-RAUR-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 11-1 Mark has created a multimedia website about tourism that contains multiple images and videos of different tourist destinations. He wants to make certain changes to the website. These changes can be performed within the browser with the help of event handlers.

61. Mark wants to upload a video of a tourist destination onto the website but is unable to do so. Which of the

following event handlers should Mark apply to handle the corresponding event in the browser? a. onbeforeunload b. onunload c. oncut Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles d. onerror ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 816 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 7:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 7:38 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPKR QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJA-CPTS-RA5D-G31UY3BU-CCSS-KCJI-CESU-13TU-GOSU-Q3MG-GASS-NAMB-GRHD-GP31-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE PREFACE GLOBAL ID: GCID-a0772c02f035-ad48-e814-25a4-61843838 62. Mark wants to add content to the website that he is creating by copying it from another web page. Which of

the following event handlers must Mark use to administer the event in the browser window of the website? a. oncopy b. onpaste c. oncut d. onunload ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 816 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 7:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 7:42 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPJT QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4NCopyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles

PREFACE GLOBAL ID:

4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJW-GE5U-NAUF-GITGKP5G-CRSU-C3B3-8RSU-RCMG-GOSU-YCJA-GYSU-NP3T-CW3G-CAJI-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE GCID-a0772c02f035-ad48-e814-25a4-61843838

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 11-2 Matt has developed a game using JavaScript that involves clicking of different mouse buttons continuously for a minute. The game provides instructions on which mouse button must be clicked and the number of times a button must be clicked to play the game.

63. Which of the following mouse event object properties counts the number of times the player clicks the

mouse button during the game? a. evt.detail b. evt.which c. evt.relatedTarget d. evt.button ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 833 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 7:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 7:46 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-KPJS QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJZ-CFUD-KCMN-GEADNPBA-GOSU-N3UF-8RSU-Y3B1-GOSS-NATT-GWSU-Y3UG-G71U-QA3I-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE PREFACE GLOBAL ID: GCID-37a41a40d313-2d1b-9324-0ff6-41495388 64. Which of the following mouse event object properties matches the mouse key that is clicked by the player

during the game? a. evt.detail b. evt.button c. evt.which d. evt.relatedTarget Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 833 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Mouse Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 7:50 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 7:51 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-COKB QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GR3G-E3TS-GOADQP3W-GASU-QPDB-8YSU-EPMG-GOSS-EPBA-CESU-N3DF-CPUD-YQBA-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 11-3 Robin has developed a typing tutorial using JavaScript that contains instructions and interactive activities and games. A user is required to press certain keys. The instructions appear on the screen when the user is using the tutorial.

65. The user is instructed to type a specific key on the left side of the keyboard when using the tutorial. Which

of the following keyboard event properties identifies if the user has pressed the specified key? a. evt.key b. evt.which c. evt.detail d. evt.location ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 844 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 8:02 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 8:03 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-COJ3 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJT-G71D-RP5B-CW3D1AJ1-CRSU-Q3BI-8YSU-GCMG-GOSS-R3UD-GOSU-NPBZ-CPOU-CCTW-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE PREFACE GLOBAL ID: GCID-cb464fa5cd4f-4b9b-1d24-7d5d-a160c87f 66. The user is instructed to press the Windows key on the PC keyboard every five seconds to complete a game.

Which of the following keyboard event properties identifies if the key has been pressed or not? a. evt.ctrlKkey b. evt.metaKey c. evt.detail d. evt.which ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 844 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 8:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 8:12 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-COKF QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-CWHD-KP5G-GITUQ3UF-GESU-E3BT-CRSU-YPUG-GOSU-GQMF-GRSU-OA5N-GFTG-CAUF-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE PREFACE GLOBAL ID: GCID-cb464fa5cd4f-4b9b-1d24-7d5d-a160c87f

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 11-4 Mathew has created a website using JavaScript. He wants to add a feature which allows a user to change the color of the cursor image with a single click on it. He uses the click point for the cursor to accomplish this.

67. What will be the default location of the click point of the cursor if no coordinates have been assigned to it? a. (x, 0) b. (0, 0) c. (0, y) Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles d. (x, y) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 848 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-4 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.06 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Changing the Cursor Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 8:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 8:16 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-COTT QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMN-CWHU-G3DBCW5D-N3BA-GRSU-KCDG-8YSU-OPBZ-GOSU-E3JW-GASU-OP31-8YHS-K3TTE7JI-YT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE PREFACE GLOBAL ID: GCID-e07a7987e379-581a-c7f4-4c9a-d7f8c8ab 68. Identify the syntax that allows the click point of the cursor to change the color of the cursor image with the

coordintaes of the centre of the image being 12, 6 respectively. a. cursor:url(image.png) 12 6, pointer; b. cursor:url(image.png)(12:6); c. cursor(image.png).pointer 12, 6; d. cursor (image.png)(url,12,6); ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 848 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.06 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Changing the Cursor Style KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 8:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 8:36 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CO31 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJZ-GA5U-NPTA-GAAGEQBZ-GESU-QCTZ-8RSU-1A5G-GOSS-GP5R-GRSS-EPDF-GY5U-QP3T-E7JICopyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles YT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 11-5 Ashton has created a website for his company using JavaScript. He wants to add dialog boxes to the website to display messages and allow the user to input text.

69. Ashton wants to create a dialog box for his website that asks the user to select OK or Cancel when he or she

decides to leave the website. Which of the following commands should Ashton use to do this? a. alert(text) b. prompt(text[, defaultInput]) c. confirm(text) d. print(text) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 866 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.08 - Work with alert, confirm, and prompt dialog boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Displaying Dialog Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 8:27 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 8:29 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CO3S QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMD-GJUG-R3TA-CO3UCPBU-GOSS-ECJS-8YSU-CAJZ-GOSU-OPDF-8YSU-KC3A-COHU-QPB3-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE PREFACE GLOBAL ID: GCID-0eaf2cfde5ce-db38-f5e4-fcf4-0c928c37 70. Which of the following commands should be used by Ashton to allow a visitor to add their personal

details using a dialog box on the website? a. alert(text[,defaultInput]) b. prompt(text[,defaultInput]) c. confirm (text[,defaultInput]) d. print(text[,defaultInput]) ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

b 1 Challenging

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles REFERENCES: HTML 866 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.08 - Work with alert, confirm, and prompt dialog boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Displaying Dialog Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 8:33 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/15/2017 1:49 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CO3W QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJZ-8R5U-OAJO-G3TGCQMD-GESU-YCMG-CESU-G3MG-GOSS-RP33-8RSU-CPMN-CE5U-RP31-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE Completion 71. _________ are actions initiated by a user or a browser, such as clicking on an object on a form or closing a

webpage.

ANSWER:

Events

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 812 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing JavaScript Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 8:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:13 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CCBU QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ3-GJOS-EQMG-GCAUK3JT-CRSS-CAMR-CESS-NPBT-GOSS-NQDB-GASU-RC5F-GT1G-CCBZ-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 72. A(n) _________ is a property that controls how an object will respond to an event, waiting until the event

occurs and then responding by running a function or a command block to execute an action. event handler ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy HTML 815

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.01 - Create an event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing JavaScript Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 9:06 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CCBS QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMN-GEHG-GA5DCWHU-NPJZ-8RSU-G3MD-8YSU-KA3Z-GOSS-CCBI-CESU-OPJI-GEAS-C3JAE7JI-YT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 73. _________ is a type of format in which the initial word in the JavaScript property is in lowercase but all the

subsequent words begin with an uppercase letter.

ANSWER: Camel case POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 823 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.02 - Reference an attribute from a page element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Object Properties KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:14 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CCJU QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMB-GBUG-EQMG-8Y3UGCJA-GYSU-RCMD-CESU-1A3I-GOSU-ECB3-COSU-EQMF-GCHG-CPUN-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 74. The _________ phase includes the event that has reached the objective of the event object and no longer

moves down the object hierarchy.

ANSWER: target POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy HTML 836 Completion

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:14 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CCJI QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJU-GWHG-GA33-CR5GCPBT-CRSU-RA3U-CESU-CPMD-GOSU-1QDF-CESU-GP5F-GC3G-NP5B-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 75. In the _________ phase, the event propagates up the object hierarchy back to the root element (browser

window) where the propagation stops.

ANSWER: bubbling POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 836 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:15 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CP1B QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMF-8FOU-NAJW-CEAURC33-CASS-RAT3-CRSS-R3DD-GOSS-G3TO-GOSS-RPMD-CPTS-NPBU-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 76. A(n) _________ observes events as they propagate through the capture, target, and bubble phases, allowing

the script to respond to an event within any phase. event listener ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy HTML 837 Completion False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:15 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CP1G QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMN-8Y3U-KCJW-8BTUOA5F-GWSS-KQDN-CESU-OATA-GOSU-13MD-CASS-NQJW-GFOU-GA5D-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 77. A browser’s default action can be prevented by returning the _____ value from an event handler function. false ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 842 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing the Event Model KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 9:26 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CPTZ QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMN-GE3D-13MF-8Y4SEA33-GOSU-RA5R-8YSS-ECJZ-GOSU-QA33-CASS-K3TS-GP1S-GAUN-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 78. The _________ event property returns a Boolean value indicating whether the Alt key was used in the event

object.

ANSWER:

evt.altKey

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 844 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:28 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 9:29 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CP4N QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMN-G3OU-CPDR-8YHUEC33-GRSS-K3BW-CESU-R3UN-GOSS-NPJT-8YSS-RP3I-G3TS-EA3O-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 79. The _________ event property returns the Unicode character code of the key used in the keypress event

or the keycode used in the keyup or keydown events. evt.which ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 844 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:31 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 9:31 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CPB3 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ3-8BUD-RCDB-CI1GECDD-GASU-NCTZ-CRSS-RAJU-GOSU-GCMF-GOSU-CCJI-8Y5G-KP5B-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 80. The Alt, Ctrl, Shift, and Command keys are examples of the _________ keys.

ANSWER: modifier POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 845 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.05 - Create code for keyboard events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Keyboard Events Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:34 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:16 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CPNG QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJU-CRHD-NPUB-8Y4DGA3I-GWSU-KQMD-8YSU-OPDG-GOSS-NCBA-GASS-KP3S-GP1D-GPUR-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE Matching

Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. oncopy b. oncut c. onload d. onpaste e. onresize DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 816 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 6:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:44 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-EAAW-GTTS 81. This event handler is used when a browser window is rescaled.

ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ1-CA3U-YAUG-GR3DCCJW-CASU-QCJI-CRSS-E3TS-GOSS-KPDF-GOSS-EQJS-CW5U-YA3Z-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 82. This event handler is used when a user downsizes the content of an element.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ1-CA3U-YAUG-GR3DCCJW-CASU-QCJI-CRSS-E3TS-GOSS-KPDF-GOSS-EQJS-CW5U-YA3Z-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNB8Y 83. This event handler is used after a page on the browser has been stacked.

ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles POINTS: 1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ1-CA3U-YAUG-GR3DCCJW-CASU-QCJI-CRSS-E3TS-GOSS-KPDF-GOSS-EQJS-CW5U-YA3Z-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNB8R 84. This event handler is used when a user replicates the content of an element.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ1-CA3U-YAUG-GR3DCCJW-CASU-QCJI-CRSS-E3TS-GOSS-KPDF-GOSS-EQJS-CW5U-YA3Z-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBER 85. This event handler is used when a user copies some content into an element.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ1-CA3U-YAUG-GR3DCCJW-CASU-QCJI-CRSS-E3TS-GOSS-KPDF-GOSS-EQJS-CW5U-YA3Z-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEA

Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. evt.button b. evt.clientX c. evt.detail d. evt.pageX e. evt.screenY DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 833 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.04 - Create code for mouse events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an Event Handler KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 6:35 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:45 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-EAAW-GTTI 86. This event property returns the number of times the mouse button was clicked.

ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GE5U-E3UF-GRHUYCDD-GRSU-RAUN-8RSU-OCJA-GOSU-O3MG-GWSS-CPBZ-8R4S-R3JU-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles 87. This event property returns the horizontal coordinate (in pixels) of the mouse pointer relative to the browser

window.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GE5U-E3UF-GRHUYCDD-GRSU-RAUN-8RSU-OCJA-GOSU-O3MG-GWSS-CPBZ-8R4S-R3JU-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBER 88. This event property returns the vertical coordinate (in pixels) of the mouse pointer relative to the monitor.

ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GE5U-E3UF-GRHUYCDD-GRSU-RAUN-8RSU-OCJA-GOSU-O3MG-GWSS-CPBZ-8R4S-R3JU-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNB8R 89. This event property returns a number indicating the mouse button that was pressed, where

0 = left, 1 = wheel or middle, and 3 = right and evt is event object for the mouse event.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GE5U-E3UF-GRHUYCDD-GRSU-RAUN-8RSU-OCJA-GOSU-O3MG-GWSS-CPBZ-8R4S-R3JU-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNB8Y 90. This event property returns the horizontal coordinate (in pixels) of the mouse pointer relative to the

document.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMMG-GE5U-E3UF-GRHUYCDD-GRSU-RAUN-8RSU-OCJA-GOSU-O3MG-GWSS-CPBZ-8R4S-R3JU-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEA Essay 91. Explain function declaration in JavaScript. How is the method of function declaration in JavaScript more

flexible?

ANSWER:

Because functions are considered as objects in JavaScript, they can be defined using function operators where the definition of the function becomes the variable’s value.

For example, the following code creates a hello function() using the function declaration format: function hello() {

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles

alert(“My name is Sean”); } The same function can be declared as a variable using the function operator in which the definition of the function becomes the variable’s “value”: var hello = function () { alert(“Welcome to Hanjie!”); } Although it is created in the form of a variable, the function is still called using the expression: hello() While the end result is the same, the two ways of defining the hello() function differ in how they are stored. Functions defined with a function declaration are created and saved as the browser parses the code prior to the script being run. The fact that the function is already stored in memory is why statements that run the function can be placed prior to the statement that declares the function.

In contrast, function operators are evaluated as they appear in the script after the code has been parsed by the browser. Function operators are thus more flexible than function declarations, allowing a function to be placed anywhere a variable can be placed.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 856 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.07 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Functions as Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 9:42 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CPBW QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJA-CAAU-GQJW-CRHGGATZ-GASS-GAMR-8RSU-GPJ1-GOSU-1ATO-CRSS-R3BW-8Y3G-R3JU-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 92. Discuss the challenges and features of anonymous functions.

ANSWER: A function having a form of declaration despite having no name is known as

anonymous function. One of the challenges of anonymous functions is keeping track of all of the nested levels of functions and procedures. Many JavaScript editors use color coding to make it easier to note when functions and methods have Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles

not been properly closed. Users should indent their code as a visual aid to track the nested levels.

Using anonymous functions can cause coding errors. Coding errors can be avoided by gradually drilling down into the lower levels of the code. The user should not insert a new nested level of procedures and functions until the outer levels are free of syntax errors.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 864 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.07 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Functions as Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 9:45 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CPJ1 QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJ1-GH5S-KPBT-CPOUCPJU-8YSU-13TI-8YSU-CC3U-GOSS-RA5G-COSU-G3B1-CEAD-NP3U-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE 93. Why are functions treated differently in JavaScript? List some unique things that are possible with functions

in JavaScript.

ANSWER:

Functions are generally treated as blocks of code that execute a series of tasks or return a calculated value. However, almost everything in JavaScript is an object and functions are no different. The fact that functions are objects means that whatever can be done with a regular object can also be done with a function. Some of the unique things that can be done with a function in JavaScript are as follows: • Storing a function as a variable • Storing a function as an object property • Using one function as a parameter in another function • Nesting one function within another function • Returning a function as the result of another function • Modifying the properties of a function Because functions are objects, there are several ways of creating and saving the functions used in a JavaScript program.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Moderate HTML 856 Essay

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 49

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 11: Working with Events and Styles HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 11.07 - Create and apply anonymous functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Functions as Objects KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/10/2017 9:37 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/10/2017 9:38 AM QUESTION ID: JFND-GO33-E3NR-CPNR QUESTION GLOBAL ID: GCID-E7BW-1TBP-CW4S-KPTT-GOHU-OCJZ-CRA1-43UG-GYH1-4CUG-CE4N4PDD-GWAN-4CJT-GF1U-RQMG-CIDI-GWN8-EPRW-EMJT-GRHG-NPUB-GBUDKCTI-CRSS-GQBO-CESU-RAJ3-GOSU-RP3Z-CESU-CCMR-CITG-NP3S-E7JIYT4D-JFNN-4OTI-GO4W-NQNBEE

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 50

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets True / False 1. The innerHTML property is equally effective for large document structures as it is for small fragments of

HTML code. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 894 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 4:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 4:52 AM 2. The contents of an HTML file are arranged in a hierarchical structure, starting from the root html element

itself and moving down to the text strings contained within individual page elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 894 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 5:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 5:06 AM 3. Each parent node can contain only one child node. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 895 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 5:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 5:09 AM 4. The node.childNodes describes a collection of all of the nodes that are direct children of node. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 895 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 5:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 5:11 AM 5. The node.previousSibling expression describes the sibling after node. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 895 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 5:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 5:13 AM 6. The node.firstElementChild property is applicable only to element nodes.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 896 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 5:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 5:16 AM 7. All the versions of Internet Explorer before IE9 do not support element node properties. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 896 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 5:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 5:19 AM 8. One advantage of the counter variable method over familial references method is that it also provides the

flexibility to insert new nodes into a document within the for loop without having to recalculate the length of the child nodes collection. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

False 1 Easy HTML 906 True / False False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.04 - Work with the properties and methods of element nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 5:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 5:21 AM 9. The node.nodeType property returns the value of a node. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 907 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.04 - Work with the properties and methods of element nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 5:24 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 5:24 AM 10. When the node.nodeType property returns a value of 8, it indicates that the node is a comment. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 907 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 7:24 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 7:25 AM 11. To represent an element name in the nodeName property, only lowercase letters are used. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 907 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 7:27 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 7:27 AM 12. Element nodes do not have a value for the nodeValue property. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 910 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 7:30 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 7:31 AM 13. An attribute node contains an attribute that can be attached to an element node. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 925 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.06 - Add attribute nodes to page elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Attribute Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

5/16/2017 7:33 AM 5/16/2017 7:33 AM

14. To create or set an attribute for an element, the createAttribute () method is used. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 926 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.06 - Add attribute nodes to page elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Attribute Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 7:35 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 7:36 AM 15. The document object model supports several methods to create, attach, and set the

values of attributes. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 926 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.06 - Add attribute nodes to page elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Attribute Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 7:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 7:53 AM 16. Style sheets loaded into a web document, both external sheets and embedded style sheets, are part of an

object collection. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

True 1 Easy

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets REFERENCES: HTML 938 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.07 - Create external and embedded style sheets with JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 7:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 7:56 AM 17. The style sheet properties that are read-only cannot be changed in JavaScript. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 938 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.07 - Create external and embedded style sheets with JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 7:57 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 7:57 AM 18. The selectorText property can only be used to read the text of a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) rule. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 945 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.07 - Create external and embedded style sheets with JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Stylesheet Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 8:00 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 8:01 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets 19. The insertrule()method is used to add style rules to an embedded style sheet. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 947 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Stylesheet Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 8:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 8:05 AM 20. An index value of 0 inserts a CSS rule at the end of a style sheet. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 946 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.08 - Add style sheets to a web document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Stylesheet Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 8:02 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 8:03 AM Multiple Choice 21. Identify the property that describes a collection of all of the element nodes contained within node. a. node.children b. node.children.length c. node.childElementCount d. node.ownerdocument ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

a 1 Easy

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets REFERENCES: HTML 896 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/5/2017 1:00 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/5/2017 1:01 AM 22. In the following code, identify the value of children.length property if article is the element node.

<article> <h1>The U.S. Constitution</h1> <h2>Preamble</h2> <p>We the People of the United States, in Order to form a more perfect Union … </p> </article> a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 896 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 8:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 8:18 AM 23. Which of the following methods creates a node containing the text string text? a. document_createText(text) b. document.createText(text) c. document_create_TextNode(text) d. document.createTextNode(text) ANSWER: POINTS:

d 1

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 900 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating and Appending Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 8:20 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 8:22 AM 24. The _____ method can be used to create a comment node containing the comment text. a. document.create(comment,text) b. document.createComment(text) c. document.create(text)Comment d. document.create.text.Comment ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 900 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating and Appending Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 8:48 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 8:49 AM 25. Which of the following methods is used to create an attribute node with the name age? a. document.create(attribute,age) b. document.createAttribute(age) c. Document_createAttribute_age d. Document_createAttribute(attribute,age) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 900 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Creating and Appending Nodes Bloom’s: Remember 5/16/2017 8:51 AM 5/16/2017 8:53 AM

26. Identify the method used to create an element node with the name elm. a. document.createElement.elm b. document.createElement(elm) c. document.createElement d. document.create(element,elm) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 900 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating and Appending Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 8:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 8:56 AM 27. Identify a true statement about the method node.cloneNode(deep). a. It creates an element node with the name “deep”. b. It creates a text node where deep is a string value. c. It creates a copy of node where deep is a Boolean value. d. It creates a copy of node with the name “deep”.

ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 900 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating and Appending Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 8:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 8:59 AM 28. Which of the following methods affixes the new node as a child of a specified node?

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets a. node.normalize(new, old) b. node.insertBefore(new, child) c. node.appendChild(new) d. node.childNodes(new) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 902 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating and Appending Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 9:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 9:02 AM 29. Which of the following methods includes or embeds a new node directly ahead of a child node? a. node.insert(new, old) b. node.insertBefore(new, child) c. node.replaceChild(new, old) d. node.appendChild(new) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 902 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating and Appending Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 9:03 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 9:04 AM 30. The _____ method traverses all of the child nodes of node where any adjacent text nodes are merged into a

single text node. a. node.append() b. node.cloneNode() c. node.children.length() d. node.normalize() ANSWER:

d

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 902 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating and Appending Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 9:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 9:25 AM 31. The _____ method discards the old node from node. a. node.replaceChild(new, old) b. node.normalize(old) c. node.removeChild(old) d. node.appendChild(old) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 902 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating and Appending Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 9:27 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 9:28 AM 32. Identify the method that eliminates the old node and exchanges it with a new node. a. node.replaceChild(new, old) b. node.normalize(old, new) c. node.removeChild(old, new) d. node.appendChild(old, new) ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 902 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating and Appending Nodes Bloom’s: Remember 5/16/2017 9:29 AM 5/16/2017 9:30 AM

33. Identify the syntax for looping through a collection of child nodes using the counter variable method. a. for (var i = 0; i < node.length.node; i++) {

commands } b. for (var i = 0; i < node.childNodes.length; i++) { commands } c. for (var i = 1; i < node.childNodes.length; i--) { commands } d. for (var i = 1; i < childNodes.length; i++) { commands } ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 905 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 9:32 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 9:33 AM 34. Which of the following methods uses familial reference to loop through a collection of child nodes? a. for (var n = node.firstChild; n !== null; n = n.nextSibling) {

commands } b. for (var n = node.firstChild; n !== null; n = n.previousSibling) { commands } c. for (var n = node.firstChild; n !== null; n = n.firstChild) { commands } d. for (var n = node.firstChild; n !== null; n = n.lastChild) { commands Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets

} ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 906 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/16/2017 9:34 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/16/2017 9:35 AM 35. Identify a true statement about the counter variable method for looping through a collection of child nodes. a. It enables the child nodes in the for loop to have the object reference as node.childNodes[i] b. It allows insertion of new node into a document within the for loop. c. It speeds up the processing time of looping through child nodes. d. It does not require a browser to calculate the total length of the child nodes collection.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 906 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 1:40 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 1:42 AM 36. Identify the value returned by the node.nodeType property for an element node. a. 2 b. 8 c. 1 d. 9 ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

a 1 Easy HTML 907

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 1:43 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 1:45 AM 37. Identify the node type when the node.nodeType property returns a value of 3. a. Attribute b. Text c. Comment d. Document ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 907 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 1:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 1:47 AM 38. Which of the following values is returned by the node.nodeType property when the node is a document? a. 2 b. 3 c. 8 d. 9 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 907 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 5/17/2017 1:49 AM 5/17/2017 1:51 AM

39. Identify the value of the node.nodeValue property for the element node. a. null b. string c. text d. value ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 907 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 1:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 1:53 AM 40. Identify the syntax that determines how a new item is inserted into a nested list. a. if (headLevel > prevLevel) {

// Append the list item to the current list } else if (headLevel < prevLevel) { // Start a new nested list } else { // Append the entry to a higher list } b. if (headLevel === prevLevel) { // Append the list item to the current list } else if (headLevel > prevLevel) { // Start a new nested list } else { // Append the entry to a higher list } c. if (headLevel > prevLevel) { // Append the list item to the current list } else if (headLevel === prevLevel) { // Start a new nested list } else { // Append the entry to a higher list } Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets d. if (headLevel !=== prevLevel) {

// Append the list item to the current list } else if (headLevel < prevLevel) { // Start a new nested list } else { // Append the entry to a higher list } ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 917 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.04 - Work with the properties and methods of element nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Nested List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 1:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 1:56 AM 41. Identify the correct syntax to move up a node tree. a. var levelUp = prevLevel - headLevel;

for (var i = 1; i <= levelUp; i++) { outlineList = outlineList.parentNode.parentNode; } b. var levelUp = prevLevel - headLevel; for (var i = 0; i >= levelUp; i++) { outlineList = outlineList.parentNode; } c. var levelUp = prevLevel + headLevel; for (var i = 1; i >= levelUp; i++) { outlineList = parentNode.outlineList.parentNode; } d. var levelUp = prevLevel - headLevel; for (var i = 0; i >= levelUp; i++) { outlineList = parentNode.outlineList.parentNode; } ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 923 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.04 - Work with the properties and methods of element nodes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating a Nested List Bloom’s: Understand 5/17/2017 2:00 AM 5/17/2017 2:01 AM

42. Which of these nodes is absent from a node tree? a. element node b. text node c. comment node d. attribute node ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 925 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.05 - Create attribute nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Attribute Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 2:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 2:04 AM 43. Which of the following methods returns the collection of attributes associated with node? a. node.getAttribute b. node.attributes c. node.hasAttribute d. node.attributes.nodeName ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 926 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.06 - Add attribute nodes to page elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Attribute Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 2:06 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 2:07 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets 44. Which of the following code creates a list item element by using the setAttribute ()method to set the

ID value of the list item to the text string “list1”? a. var listElem = document.createElement(“li”); listElem.setAttribute(“id”,”list1”); b. var listElem = document.createElement(“list1”); listElem.setAttribute(“id”); c. var listElem = document.Element(“li”); listElem.setAttribute(”list1”); d. var listElem = document.createElement(“li”); listElem.getAttribute(“id”,list1); ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 926 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.06 - Add attribute nodes to page elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Attribute Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 2:09 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 2:11 AM 45. Which of the following properties returns the Boolean value true when an element contains an attribute? a. node.getAttribute b. node.hasAttribute c. node.setAttribute d. node.Attribute ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 926 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.06 - Add attribute nodes to page elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Attribute Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 2:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 2:14 AM 46. Which of the following codes inserts text for each item as a hyperlink?

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets a. var linkElem = document.createElement(“a”);

linkElem.innerHTML = linkElem.setAttribute(“href”, “#” + n.id); b. var linkElem = document.createElement(“a”); linkElem.innerHTML = n.innerHTML; linkElem.setAttribute(“href”) c. var linkElem = document.createElement(“a”); linkElem.innerHTML = n.innerHTML; linkElem.setAttribute(“href”, “#” + n.id); d. var linkElem = document.createElement(“a”); linkElem.setAttribute(“href”, “#” + n.id); ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 931 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.06 - Add attribute nodes to page elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Attribute Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 2:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 2:17 AM 47. The _____ property represents the object collection of style guidelines within a style sheet. a. sheet.parentStyleSheet b. sheet.title c. sheet.type d. sheet.cssRules ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 938 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.07 - Create external and embedded style sheets with JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 2:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 2:22 AM 48. Which of these properties describes the URL of a styleSheet file?

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets a. sheet.media b. sheet.href c. sheet.type d. sheet.title ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 938 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.07 - Create external and embedded style sheets with JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 2:37 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 2:38 AM 49. The _____ property describes the embed or link element node that creates a style sheet. a. sheet.elementnode b. sheet.rootnode c. sheet.ownerNode d. sheet.attributenode ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 938 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.07 - Create external and embedded style sheets with JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 3:56 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 3:57 AM 50. Identify a true statement about the sheet.parentStyleSheet property. a. It describes the URL of the style sheet file or an empty text string for an embedded style sheet. b. It describes the style sheet object containing the style sheet inserted via the @import rule. c. It describes the object collection of style rules within the style sheet. d. It describes a Boolean value to indicate whether the style sheet is enabled (false) or disabled (true).

ANSWER:

b

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 938 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.07 - Create external and embedded style sheets with JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 3:59 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:00 AM 51. William has created a page view style sheet and saved it in a file named esd.css. Which of the following tags

should William add to the document head to apply the style sheet? a. <link media=”esd.css” rel=”stylesheet” /> b. <link title=”esd.css” rel=”stylesheet” /> c. <link href=”esd.css” rel=”stylesheet” /> d. <link type=”esd.css” rel=”stylesheet” /> ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 939 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.08 - Add style sheets to a web document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:02 AM 52. Identify the HTML code to create form buttons to switch between the web view and page view. a. <div id=”styleButtons”>

<input type=”button” value=”Web View” /> <input type=”button” value=”Page View” /> </div> b. <div id=”styleButtons”> <input value=”button” type=”Web View” /> <input value=”button” type=”Page View” /> </div> c. <div id=”styleButtons”> <input style=”button” value=”Web View” /> <input style=”button” value=”Page View” /> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets

</div> d. <div id=”styleButtons”> <input=”button” type=”Web View” /> <input=”button” type=”Page View” /> <div> ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 942 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.08 - Add style sheets to a web document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:05 AM 53. In the following HTML code, the object reference document.styleSheets[0].cssRules[1]

points to the _____ style rule. <style id=”hStyles”> h1 {color: red;} h2 {color: blue;} h3 {color: green;} h4 {color: violet;} </style> a. First, h1 {color: red;} b. Second, h2 {color: blue;} c. Third, h3 {color: green;} d. Fourth, h4 {color: violet;} ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 945 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:09 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets 54. Which of these rules is represented by the rule.type property when its value is 5? a. @media b. @font-face c. unknown d. style rule ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 945 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:11 AM 55. Identify the integer value returned by the rule.type property if it is describing the @media rule. a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 945 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:13 AM 56. A value of _____ is returned when the rule.type property describes the @charset rule. a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets d. 4 ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 945 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:16 AM 57. The _____ style rule is described by the rule.type property if it returns an integer value of 6. a. @charset b. @import c. @media d. @page ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 945 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:19 AM 58. Joshua has created a web page and implemented CSS in it. He has applied the style property to inline styles

that can also be used with style rules and with style sheets. However, he wants to change a CSS rule in the stylesheet from h2 { color: blue; } to h3 { color: green; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets

font-size: 1.2em; } a.

document.styleSheets[0]. cssRules[1].selectorText = “h2”; document.styleSheets[0]. cssRules[1].style.color = “blue”; document.styleSheets[0] .cssRules[1].style.fontSize = “1.2em”; b. document.styleSheets[1]. cssRules[0].selectorText = “h3”; document.styleSheets[1]. cssRules[0].style.color = “green”; document.styleSheets[0] .cssRules[1].style.fontSize = “1.2em”; c.

d.

document.styleSheets[1]. cssRules[0].selectorText = “h2”; document.styleSheets[1]. cssRules[0].style.color = “blue”; document.styleSheets[0] .cssRules[1].style.fontSize = “1.2em”; document.styleSheets[0]. cssRules[1].selectorText = “h3”; document.styleSheets[0]. cssRules[1].style.color = “green”; document.styleSheets[0] .cssRules[1].style.fontSize = “1.2em”;

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 945 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:25 AM 59. Identify the syntax for adding new rules to a style sheet. a. sheet.insertRule(rule, index) b. sheet.insertRule(index) Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets c. sheet.insertRule(rule) d. sheet.insertRule(index, rule) ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 946 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:27 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:28 AM 60. Identify the syntax to remove a rule from a style sheet. a. sheet.deleteRule(rule,index) b. sheet.deleteRule(index) c. sheet.deleteRule(rule) d. sheet.deleteRule(index, rule) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 946 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:30 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:31 AM

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 12-1 Consider the following code that Wilson has written in HTML: <html> <head> <title>Historic Documents</title> </head> <body> <h1>Dept. of History</h1> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets

<p>The <b>constitution</b> online.</p> </body> </html> 61. Identify the value that the node.nodeType property will return for the "Dept. of History" node. a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 9 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 908 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 12-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.03 - Append nodes to a web document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:37 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:46 AM 62. Identify the headLevel value for the element node “Dept. of History". a. 0 b. 1 c. 2 d. 3 ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 908 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 12-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.03 - Append nodes to a web document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Node Types, Names, and Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:43 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 12-2 Samantha has been asked by her university to create a website that contains a list of all the subjects that the students in Computer Science and Information Science can take up during each semester in college.

She wants to create a nested list that will contain an h1 heading level for a student’s chosen subject stream, h2 heading level for the semester number, h3 heading level for the name of the subject, and h4 heading level for its subdivisions.

63. While creating the nested list, Samantha has to include Computer Science as a new list item. Identify the

level of the newly inserted item. a. 0 b. 1 c. 2 d. 3 ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 916 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 12-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.04 - Work with the properties and methods of element nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Nested List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:50 AM 64. Which of the following rules must Samantha use to determine the insertion of a sub division of a subject

right after the subject is inserted into the list? a. The sub-division of the subject will simply be appended to the current ordered list. b. The sub-division of the subject will be placed in a new ordered list that is nested within the current ordered list. c. The sub-division of the subject will be appended to the corresponding ordered list higher up in the table of contents d. The sub-division of the subject can be placed anywhere in the list as long as it is mentioned.

ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

b 1 Challenging HTML 917 Multiple Choice False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets PREFACE NAME: Case 12-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.04 - Work with the properties and methods of element nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Nested List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:51 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 4:52 AM

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 12-3 Natasha has created the following nested list: <ol> <li>h1 text</li> <li>h1 text <ol> <li>h2 text</li> <li>h2 text <ol> <li>h3 text</li> <li>h3 text <ol> <li>h4 text</li> </ol> </li> </ol> </li> <li>h1 text</li> </ol> 65. Natasha wants to add a new entry to the accompanying list, which requires her moving from the h3 heading

level to the h1 heading level. Identify the number of levels Natasha needs to traverse to add the new entry to the list. a. 4 b. 3 c. 2 d. 0 ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES: PREFACE NAME:

a 1 Challenging HTML 922 Multiple Choice False Case 12-3

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.04 - Work with the properties and methods of element nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Nested List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:02 AM 66. Identify the total number of times the parentNode property will be applied if Natasha wants to move from

the h4 heading level to the h1 heading level. a. 3 b. 4 c. 6 d. 8 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 922 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 12-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.04 - Work with the properties and methods of element nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Nested List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 4:58 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:03 AM

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 12-4 Jonathan has created a web document and has included multiple stylesheets in it. He wants to access details of the stylesheets included in the web document using stylesheet properties.

67. Which of the following properties will provide Jonathan with the exact number of stylesheets loaded into the

web document? a. document.styleSheets.length b. document.styleSheets.size c. document.styleSheets.title d. document.styleSheets.number ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

a 1 Challenging

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets REFERENCES: HTML 938 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 12-4 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.08 - Add style sheets to a web document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:06 AM 68. Jonathan wants to access the last style sheet in the object collection document.styleSheets. Which of

the following syntaxes should he use to reference the last style sheet? a. document.styleSheets [document.styleSheets.length+1] b. document.styleSheets[length+1] c. document.styleSheets [document.styleSheets.length-1] d. document.styleSheets[length-1] ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 938 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.08 - Add style sheets to a web document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:09 AM

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 12-5 William has created the following style sheet rule for his website. <style id=”hStyles”> h1 {color: violet;} h2 {color: yellow;} h3 {color: black;} h4 {color: blue;} </style> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets 69. While creating the website, William wants to add a new style sheet rule to the code.

h3 { color: magenta; } Identify the correct syntax for adding the style as the fifth rule in the accompanying code. a. document.styleSheets[0].insertRule(“h3 {color: magenta;}”, 4); b. document.styleSheets.insertRule[1](“h3 {color: magenta;}”, 5); c. document.insertRule[0](“h3 {color: magenta;}”, 4); d. document.insertRule[1].StyleSheets(“h3 {color: magenta;}”, 5); ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 946 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 12-5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.08 - Add style sheets to a web document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:13 AM 70. Which of the following syntaxes must William apply to the style sheet to remove the color violet completely

from the website? a. sheet.deleteRule(0) b. document.deleteRule(0) c. sheet.deleteRule(1) d. document.deleteRule(1) ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 946 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 12-5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.08 - Add style sheets to a web document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:15 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets DATE MODIFIED:

5/17/2017 5:16 AM

Completion 71. The hierarchical structure of the nodes is referred to as the _________. node tree ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 894 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:19 AM 72. The parent node is also known as the _________ node. root ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 895 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:21 AM 73. The _________ expression describes the root node of a document. node.ownerdocument ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 895 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

5/17/2017 5:23 AM 5/17/2017 5:24 AM

74. The _________ property describes the first element within node. node.firstElementChild ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 896 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:26 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:26 AM 75. When a node is created, it is added to the computer memory as a _________ by appending it to a node

within a tree. document fragment ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 901 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating and Appending Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:28 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:29 AM 76. The _________ property returns an integer indicating whether the node refers to an

element, an attribute, a text string, a comment, a document, or another type of node. nodeType ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 907 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.02 - Create element and text nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Working with Node Types, Names, and Values Bloom’s: Remember 5/17/2017 5:30 AM 5/17/2017 5:31 AM

77. While creating a nested list, the level of each list can be determined by the _________ function. indexof() ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 916 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.04 - Work with the properties and methods of element nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Nested List KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:33 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:34 AM 78. The _________ node contains an attribute that can be attached to an element node. attribute ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 925 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.05 - Create attribute nodes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Attribute Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:36 AM 79. To change an existing rule, the _________ properties are used. style and selectorText ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 945 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Working with Stylesheet Rules Bloom’s: Remember 5/17/2017 5:40 AM 5/17/2017 5:41 AM

80. The final appearance of any page element is determined by the _________ style, which is based on all of the

styles found within external style sheets, embedded sheets, inline styles, and the styles built into the browser itself.

ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 951 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.10 - Enable and disable style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheet Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:42 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 5:43 AM Matching

Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. node.children.length b. node.lastElementChild c. node.nextElementSibling d. node.previousElementSibling e. node.childElementCount DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 896 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 5:56 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:46 AM 81. The immediate sibling element after node ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 82. The total number of child elements within node Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 83. The number of child elements within node ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 84. The final element within node ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 85. The immediate sibling element before node ANSWER: d POINTS: 1

Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. rule.cssText b. rule.parentRule c. rule.parentStyleSheet d. rule.selectorText e. rule.style.property DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 945 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.09 - Create a style rule for an embedded style sheet NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheet Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 6:09 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 6:47 AM 86. The text of the patterns that select the element(s) to be styled for rule ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 87. The contents of rule as a text string (read-only) ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 88. The value of a style feature within rule ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 89. The style sheet containing rule (read-only) ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets POINTS:

1

90. The style rule containing rule as a parent (read-only) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Essay 91. Explain the hierarchical or tree-like structure of an HTML file with an example.

ANSWER: The contents of an HTML file are arranged in a hierarchical structure, starting from

the root html element itself and moving down to the text strings contained within individual page elements. Each piece in this hierarchal structure is a node including each element tag, element attribute, comment tag, processing instruction, and text string.

For example, the following fragment of HTML code, <h1>Outline</h1> consists of two nodes—one node for the h1 element and one node for the text string, “Outline” contained within that element. The hierarchical structure of the nodes is referred to as the node tree.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 894 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 6:49 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 6:50 AM 92. Explain the statement: “Nodes in the node tree have a familial relationship.”

ANSWER: The hierarchical structure of the nodes is referred to as the node tree. Each node can

be a parent, child, and/or sibling of other nodes. This relationship is indicated using the expression node.relationship where node is a currently selected node or object, and relationship is the relationship of another node to the current node. For example, the expression node.parentNode refers to the parent of node.

In a node tree, the parent of the body node is the html node, and the parent of the Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets

html node is the document node, which is also known as the root node.

Each node can contain one or more child nodes. To reference the first child of the current node, apply the following expression: node.firstChild.

As with other object collections, a particular item from the childNodes collection can be referenced using the following index number: node.childNodes[i] where i is the index number, starting with 0 for the first child node.

To determine the total number of child nodes for a given node, apply the following length property: node.childNodes.length.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 895 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.01 - Explore nodes and the node tree NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Nodes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 6:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 6:52 AM 93. What are calculated styles based on? Explain how the calculated value of a specific style is retrieved.

ANSWER: The calculated style is based on all of the styles found within external style sheets,

embedded sheets, inline styles, and the styles built into the browser itself. Some applications may want the calculated styles to be retrieved. For example, a program that works with the page layout might need to retrieve the height of page columns in pixels and the width of a page article as it is rendered by the browser. This information can be retrieved using the following getComputedStyle() method: document.getComputedStyle(object, pseudo) where object is a page object and pseudo is a text string containing a pseudoelement that is applied to the page object. If no pseudo-element is used, the pseudo value is set to null.

The getComputedStyle() method returns a CSSStyleDeclaration object containing all the calculated styles for that page object. For example, the following code retrieves the calculated styles for the first paragraph of the current document: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 12: Working with Document Nodes and Style Sheets

var p1 = document.getElementsByTagName(“p”)[0]; var p1Styles = document.getComputedStyle(p1, null); The calculated value of a specific style is retrieved using styleDeclaration.getPropertyValue(styleText) or styleDeclaration.style where styleDeclaration is a CSSStyleDeclaration object, styleText is a text string containing a CSS style property, and style is the JavaScript name of a style property. Thus, to view the font size of the first paragraph from the previous code, either of the following codes can be used: p1Styles.getPropertyValue(“font-size”) or p1Styles.fontSize Calculated styles are read-only values and cannot be changed via JavaScript. The values are expressed in absolute units based on how the browser renders the object.

Thus, a calculated property that measures a size is expressed only in pixels.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 951 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 12.10 - Enable and disable style sheets NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Style Sheet Rules KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 5/17/2017 6:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 5/17/2017 6:55 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms True / False 1. The element.value = value; expression is applied to set the value of an input control. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 975 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.01 - Reference forms and form fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Input Fields KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/12/2017 5:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 4:10 AM 2. The input.defaultValue method returns whether the input box is read-only or not. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 976 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.01 - Reference forms and form fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Input Fields KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/12/2017 7:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/12/2017 7:23 AM 3. The select.name method returns the selection list field name. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

True 1 Easy HTML 978

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Selection Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/12/2017 7:33 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/12/2017 7:33 AM 4. The option.text method returns the field value of option. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 979 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Selection Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/12/2017 7:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 1:01 AM 5. To determine which option button has been checked by the user, you must examine the disabled property

of each button. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 982 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology ACCREDITING STANDARDS: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: F TOPICS: Working with Options Buttons and Check Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/12/2017 7:48 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 1:05 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms 6. The value associated with a checked box is stored in the name property of the check box object. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 984 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Options Buttons and Check Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 1:02 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 1:04 AM 7. You can control the number of digits displayed by the browser using the toFixed() method. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 986 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Formatting Numeric Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 1:09 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:56 AM 8. With no arguments, the toLocaleString() method displays the numeric value using the local standards

on the user’s computer. a. True b. False ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

True 1 Easy HTML 986 True / False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Formatting Numeric Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 1:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:57 AM 9. The element.onselect event handler signifies that the element value is invalid. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 991 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying Form Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 1:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:59 AM 10. For options buttons and check boxes, you can use the onclick event handler in response to

the user clicking those elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 991 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying Form Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 1:29 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 4:00 AM 11. Each field/value pair is separated by the * character.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1000 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 1:33 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:48 AM 12. To extract useful information from the query string, you must first work with the properties and methods of

the location object. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1000 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 1:41 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:49 AM 13. You can load a new page in the current window with the window.location = url command. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1000 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Sharing Data between Forms Bloom’s: Remember 6/13/2017 1:44 AM 6/13/2017 3:49 AM

14. The charAt() method can extract long text strings. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1003 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 1:50 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:50 AM 15. To make a regular expression insensitive to case, add the i flag to the regular expression. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1008 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 1:55 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:51 AM 16. The \D character signifies a digit from 0 to 9. a. True b. False ANSWER: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1008 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 2:05 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:53 AM 17. Word boundaries are indicated by the \b symbol. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1009 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 2:08 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:54 AM 18. The element.valid property of Constraint Validation API returns true if element fails validation. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1029 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.08 - Work with the validity State object NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating Data with JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 2:11 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms DATE MODIFIED:

6/13/2017 3:54 AM

19. The regular expression for 4-digit CVC numbers used by American Express card holders is /^\d{4}$/. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1039 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.10 - Validate credit card numbers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: : Testing a Form Field against a Regular Expression KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 2:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:55 AM 20. The Luhn Algorithm provides a quick validation check on an account number by ensuring that the sum of

the digits in the number meet certain mathematical criteria a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1041 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.10 - Validate credit card numbers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Testing for Legitimate Card Numbers KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 2:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 3:55 AM Multiple Choice 21. Since a page can contain multiple web forms, JavaScript organizes the forms into _____ object collection. a. document.idref[forms] b. idref.document[forms] c. document.forms[idref] d. forms.document[idref] Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 972 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.01 - Reference forms and form fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Forms Object KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 4:02 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 2:10 AM 22. Which of the following expressions can be used to reference a form element using its name or id attribute? a. form.elements.ename; b. ename.form.elements; c. elements.form.ename; d. ename.elements.form; ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 974 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.01 - Reference forms and form fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Form Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 4:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 4:12 AM 23. Identify the input field property or method that can be used to remove the focus from the input box. a. input.focus() b. input.pattern c. input.blur() d. input.required ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

c 1 Easy HTML 976 Multiple Choice False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.01 - Reference forms and form fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Input Fields KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 4:18 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:16 AM 24. Identify the input field property or method that can be used to return the current value displayed in the input

box. a. input.focus() b. input.defaultValue c. input.blur() d. input.value ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 976 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.01 - Reference forms and form fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Input Fields KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 4:21 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:17 AM 25. Which of the following selection list properties returns true if more than one option can be selected from

the list? a. select.options b. select.length c. select.size d. select.multiple ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 978 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Selection Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

6/13/2017 4:25 AM 6/13/2017 4:26 AM

26. _____ is a selection list property that returns the number of options displayed in the selection list. a. select.options b. select.length c. select.size d. select.multiple ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 978 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Selection Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 4:29 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 4:30 AM 27. Identify the options object collection in which the selection list options are organized. a. select.options b. options.length c. select.options[idref] d. idref.options[select] ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 979 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Selection Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 4:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 4:37 AM 28. Identify the description of the option.selected property. a. It returns true if the option has been selected by default. b. It returns true if the option has been selected by user.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms c. It returns true if more than one option can be selected from the list. d. It returns true if no option can be selected from the list.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 979 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Selection Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 4:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 4:47 AM 29. Radio buttons are grouped by a common field name placed within the _____ array. a. options[idref] b. length[idref] c. select.options[idref] d. select.length[idref] ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 982 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Options Buttons and Check Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 4:52 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 4:53 AM 30. The _____ property returns a Boolean value indicating whether the option button, option, is currently

checked by a user. a. option.value b. option.checked c. option.defaultChecked d. option.name ANSWER: POINTS:

b 1

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 982 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Options Buttons and Check Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 4:57 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 4:58 AM 31. Which of the following CSS selector returns the option button that is checked within the protection field? a. input[name=”protection”]:checked b. name[input=”protection”]:checked c. name[input=”checked”]:protection d. input[name=”checked”]:protection ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 983 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.03 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANS: T NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Options Buttons and Check Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 5:03 AM 32. Identify the toLocaleString() method that gives you more control while formatting numeric values. a. locale.toLocaleString(value, {options}) b. value.toLocaleString(locale, {options}) c. options.toLocaleString(locale, {value}) d. value.toLocaleString(options, {locale}) ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 986 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Formatting Numeric Values Bloom’s: Remember 6/13/2017 5:06 AM 6/13/2017 5:07 AM

33. Which of the following descriptions corresponds to the currency:code option from the

toLocaleString() method? a. Currency symbol to use for currency formatting where code designates the country or language b. Currency symbol to use for currency formatting where code is the ISO currency code c. Currency symbol to use for indicating whether to use a thousands grouping symbol (true) or not (false) d. Currency symbol to use for currency formatting wherecodeis “symbol” for a currency symbol ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 987 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Formatting Numeric Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:26 AM 34. The _____ option from the toLocaleString() method indicates whether to use a thousands grouping

symbol (true) or not (false). a. style: type b. minimumSignficantDigits: num c. useGroup: Boolean d. maximumSignificantDigits: num ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 987 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Formatting Numeric Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

6/13/2017 5:14 AM 6/13/2017 5:15 AM

35. For options buttons and check boxes, use the _____ event handler in response to the user clicking those

elements. a. onselect b. onreset c. onclick d. oninput ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 991 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying Form Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:17 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:28 AM 36. In many web forms, important data is stored within _____ so that the data is available to programmers but

removed from the user’s control. a. event handlers b. hidden fields c. reference forms d. radio buttons ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 993 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Hidden Fields KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 5:25 AM 37. Identify the reason for which <form method="get" action="url"> attribute is added to a form Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms

element. a. To find the pathname of the URL b. retrieve specific information about the URL c. To append form data to the URL d. To load a new document with the URL ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 998 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:29 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 5:32 AM 38. Using the _____, you can direct the browser to retrieve specific information about the URL, to reload the

current page, or to load an entirely new page. a. selection list b. hidden field c. reference form d. location object ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1000 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 5:37 AM 39. Identify the method associated with browser locations that can find the protocol, hostname, and port number

of the URL. a. location.pathname b. location.hash c. location.origin Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms d. location.search ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1000 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 5:45 AM 40. Which of the following location methods returns the href portion of the location’s URL? a. location.assign(newurl) b. location.hash c. location.toString() d. location.searchname ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1001 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Text Strings KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:46 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 5:47 AM 41. Identify the object constructor that can be used to create a text string explicitly. a. var stringVar = new String(text b. new string stringVar = var(text c. stringVar = new String(var); d. var stringVar = new Stringvar(var); ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

c 1 Moderate HTML 1002 Multiple Choice

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Text Strings KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:50 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 5:56 AM 42. Which of the following methods can be used to reference a character at the index i of the string? a. string.charAt(I) b. string(i).charAt c. charAt.string(i) d. charAt(i).string ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1002 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Text Strings KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 5:55 AM 43. Which of the following methods can be used to extract longer text strings? a. slice.string(start [,end]) b. string.start(slice [,end]) c. string.slice(start [,end]) d. slice.start(string [,end]) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1003 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Text Strings KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 5:58 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms DATE MODIFIED:

6/13/2017 5:59 AM

44. Identify the method that can be used to create an array of substrings. a. strArray = split.string (str) b. strArray = string.split(str) c. strArray = str.split(string) d. strArray = (str)string.split ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1003 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Text Strings KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:01 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:33 AM 45. Identify the use of string.indexOf(str [,start])method. a. To create an array of substrings b. To extract text strings known as substrings c. To reference a character d. To search for the occurrence of a substring within larger text strings ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: 1003 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Text Strings KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:04 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 2:18 AM 46. Regular expressions have the general form denoted as _____. a. *pattern* b. [pattern] c. /pattern/ Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms d. //pattern// ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: 1006 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:08 AM 47. Identify the action for which the g flag is added at the end of the regular expression /pattern/. a. To perform a global search b. To create an array of substrings c. To make a regular expression insensitive to case d. To retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1008 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:10 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:21 AM 48. Identify the description for the \b character type. a. Not a word boundary b. A blank space c. A word boundary d. Any character ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

c 1 Easy HTML 1008

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:12 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:13 AM 49. Which of the following character types is used for any non-white-space character? a. \s b. \S c. \w d. \W ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1008 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:16 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 2:27 AM 50. What does & signify in the string “R2D2&C3PO”? a. A new line between words b. A white space between words c. A character between words d. A boundary between words ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML1009 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

6/13/2017 6:19 AM 6/13/2017 6:21 AM

51. The regular expression pattern for a character class is _____. a. *chars* b. [chars] c. (chars) d. /chars/ ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: 1010 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:24 AM 52. To create a negative character class that matches any character not in the class, preface the list of characters

with the _____ symbol. a. ^ b. # c. & d. * ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: 1011 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:26 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:27 AM 53. Which of the following should be appended to a character to repeat it n times? a. [n] Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms b. “n” c. {n} d. (n) ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: 1012 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:29 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:30 AM 54. In a regular expression, you can define two possible patterns for the same text string by joining different

patterns using the _____ character. 13 a. & b. * c. + d. | ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1014 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:32 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:33 AM 55. Identify the syntax used to group character symbols so they can be treated as a single unit. a. {pattern} b. (pattern) c. [pattern] d. “pattern” ANSWER:

b

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1015 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:36 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:37 AM 56. The code of a regular expression can be directly entered in JavaScript as a _____. a. regular expression pattern b. regular expression literal c. regular expression match d. regular expression symbol ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: 1016 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Programming with Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:38 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:39 AM 57. When the browser encounters a character in a field name or value that is reserved for other purposes, it

replaces the character with a character code known as the _____. a. URL query string b. form field c. radio button d. URI encoded character ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

d 1 Easy HTML 1020 Multiple Choice False

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.7 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Programming with Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:45 AM 58. Identify the collective term that denotes the form validation properties and methods built into JavaScript that

can be used to supplement the native browser validation tools. a. pop-up error messages b. Custom validation messages c. Constraint Validation API d. Remote Method Invocation API ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1029 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.7 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Programming with Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:47 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:48 AM 59. Which of the following objects is used by JavaScript to store the reason for failing validation? a. ValidityState b. checkValidity c. willValidate d. noValidate ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1030 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.08 - Work with the validity State object NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating Data with JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:50 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms DATE MODIFIED:

6/13/2017 6:51 AM

60. In addition to a specified pattern of characters, all legitimate credit card numbers must satisfy the Luhn

Algorithm also known as the _____. a. Euclid’s Algorithm b. Mod10 Algorithm c. Verhoeff Algorithm d. Damm Algorithm ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1041 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.10 - Validate credit card numbers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Testing for Legitimate Card Numbers KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 6:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 6:54 AM

Case based critical thinking Case 13-1 Sarah wants to set the value of an input control. She applies the element.value = value; expression.

61. What does element signify in the expression that Sarah has used? a. Reference to a form element b. Index number of the form c. Value to be stored in the element d. Reference to a web form ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 975 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 13-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.01 - Reference forms and form fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Input Fields KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

6/13/2017 8:14 AM 6/13/2017 11:43 PM

62. Which of the following methods should Sarah use to return the default value for the input box? a. input.value b. input.focus() c. input.defaultValue d. input.select() ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 976 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 13-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.01 - Reference forms and form fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Input Fields KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 8:23 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 11:44 PM

Case based critical thinking Case 13-2 Lisa can control the number of digits displayed by the browser using the toFixed() method. However, since the toFixed() method is limited to only defining the decimal place accuracy, she wants to use a method that gives her more control over the numeric format, such as formatting numbers as currency or separating thousands with the comma symbol.

63. Which of the following methods should Lisa use to format the numbers as currency? a. currency: code b. toLocaleString() c. useGroup: Boolean d. element.oninput ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES: PREFACE NAME:

b 1 Challenging HTML 986 Multiple Choice False Case 13-2

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Formatting Numeric Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 10:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 11:45 PM 64. If Lisa uses minimumIntegerDigits: num method, which of the following is the correct range for

num? a. 0 to 20 b. 1 to 20 c. 0 to 19 d. 1 to 21 ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 987 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 13-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Formatting Numeric Values KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 10:48 PM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 11:46 PM

Case based critical thinking Case 13-3 Thomas is working on reference forms and form fields. He wants to use event handlers that can respond to user actions within a form. He uses the element.onchange event handler.

65. Identify the description of the event handler Thomas has used. a. The element has received user input b. The value of element has been modified c. The element value is invalid d. The form element has lost the focus ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

b 1 Challenging HTML 991

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 13-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Applying Form Events KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 11:02 PM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 11:48 PM 66. Which event handler should Thomas use for options buttons and check boxes in response to

the user clicking those elements? a. element.onfocus b. element.onreset c. element.onblur d. element.onclick ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 991 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 13-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.04 - Format numeric and currency data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 11:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 11:49 PM

Case based critical thinking Case 13-4 Samantha is working on a web document. She wants to direct the browser to retrieve specific information about a URL, to reload the current page, and to load an entirely new page.

67. Identify the object that Samantha should use to meet her desired requirements. a. location b. option c. form d. string ANSWER:

a

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1000 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 13-4 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 11:24 PM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 11:51 PM 68. Which of the following commands can Samantha use to load a new page in the current window? a. window.location = url b. url.window = location c. window.url = location d. location.url = window ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1000 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 13-4 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 11:28 PM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 11:53 PM

Case based critical thinking Case 13-5 William is exploring the syntax of regular expressions. He learns that in the regular expression language, a word refers to any string of symbols consisting solely of word characters. He also learns that word boundaries are indicated by the \b symbol. He wants to use a pattern that matches any word that starts with the characters “great” such as “greater”, “greatness”, or “greatest” 69. Which of the following patterns should William use? a. //bgreat/ b. /\bgreat/ Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms c. /bgreat/ d. /b\great/ ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1009 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 13-5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 11:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 11:54 PM 70. Which of the following patterns should William use to match any word that ends with “ust” such as “dust”,

“trust”, or “must”? a. /ust\b/ b. /\bust/ c. \bust/ d. /b\ust/ ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1009 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 13-5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Apply DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 11:39 PM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 11:41 PM Completion 71. The _________ contains field names and data values appended to a URL. query string ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms REFERENCES: HTML 999 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/13/2017 11:55 PM DATE MODIFIED: 6/13/2017 11:56 PM 72. The current location of a web document (as displayed in the browser’s address bar) is stored in the

_________. location object ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1000 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Sharing Data between Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 12:00 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 10:30 AM 73. Longer text strings that contain more than one character are also known as _________. substrings ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1003 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Text Strings KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 12:03 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 12:04 AM 74. While creating an array of substrings using the strArray = string.split(str) method, str acts

as a(n) _________ that marks the break between one substring and another. delimiter ANSWER: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1003 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Text Strings KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 12:07 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 12:07 AM 75. A(n) _________ is a text string that defines a character pattern. regular expression ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1006 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 12:11 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 12:11 AM 76. You can add a(n) _________ to the end of a regular expression to override the default pattern matching. flag ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1008 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.07 - Use a regular expression to extract data from the URL query string NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 12:15 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 12:16 AM 77. _________ are either alphabetical characters, digits, or the underscore character ( _ ).

Word characters ANSWER: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1008 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 12:19 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 12:19 AM 78. In the regular expression language, any string of symbols consisting solely of word characters is termed as

a(n) _________. word ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1009 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 12:22 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 12:23 AM 79. You can specify a collection of characters known as a(n) _________ to limit the regular expression to a

select group of characters ANSWER:

character class

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1010 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 12:25 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 12:25 AM 80. You can use a(n) _________ by prefacing the character with the backslash character (\) to indicate that the Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms

character that follows should be interpreted as a character and not a command. escape sequence ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1013 QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.06 - Explore the Syntax of Regular Expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introducing Regular Expressions KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 12:28 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 12:29 AM Matching

Match the following properties/methods to their respective descriptions. a. form.length b. form.reset() c. form.submit() d. form.requestAutocomplete() e. form.autocomplete DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 973 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.01 - Reference forms and form fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Forms Object KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 1:14 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:48 AM 81. Allows the browser to automatically complete form fields ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 82. Returns the number of elements in the form ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 83. Initiates autocompletion of those form fields that have autocomplete activated ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms 84. Resets the web form ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 85. Submits the web form ANSWER: c POINTS: 1

Match the following validation states to their respective descriptions. a. element.validity.badInput b. element.validity.customError c. element.validity.patternMismatch d. element.validity.tooLong e. element.validity.typeMismatch f. element.validity.valid DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1030 QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.08 - Work with the validity State object NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating Data with Javascript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 1:34 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:48 AM 86. The element contains data that does not match the data type specified by the type attribute.

ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 87. The element contains data whose character length exceeds the value of the length attribute.

ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 88. The element contains valid data, satisfying all constraints.

ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 89. The element contains data that does not match the character pattern specified in the pattern attribute.

ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 90. A custom validation message has been set to a nonempty text string using the setCustomValidity()

method.

ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms 91. The field element, element, contains data that the browser is unable to convert.

ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 Essay 92. Explain how you can work with selection lists.

ANSWER: The value of a selection list is determined by which option has been selected by a

user. The selection list options are organized into the following options object collection: select.options[idref] where select is the reference to the selection list object and idref is the index number or ID of the option.

To return the value from a selection list field, you must first determine which option button has been selected using the selectedIndex property. The following code demonstrates how to return the value of the selected option from the model selection list. var orderForm = document.forms.orderForm; var model = orderForm.elements.model; var modelIndex = model.selectedIndex; var modelValue = model.options[modelIndex].value; POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 978 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.01 - Reference forms and form fields NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Selection Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 1:44 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 1:49 AM 93. Explain how you can work with radio buttons and check boxes.

ANSWER: Option or radio buttons are grouped by a common field name placed within the

following array: options[idref] where options is the common field name used by all the option buttons and idref is either the index number or ID of the option button. For example, the first option button for the protection field from the customer order form would have the following reference: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms

document.forms.orderForm.elements.protection[0] To determine which option button has been checked by the user, you have to examine the checked property of each button. For example, the following code uses a for loop to go through each option button associated with the protection field, storing the value of the selected option in the pCost variable, and breaking off the for loop once the checked button has been located: var orderForm = document.forms.orderForm; var protection = orderForm.elements.protection; for (var i = 0; i < protection.length; i++) { if (protection[i].checked === true) { var pCost = protection[i].value; break; } } Check box controls work the same way as option buttons in which the checked property indicates whether the box is checked and the value associated with a checked box is stored in the value property of the check box object. However, this value is applied only when the check box is checked; otherwise there is no field value associated with the element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 982 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.02 - Retrieve field values from selection lists and radio buttons NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Options Buttons and Check Boxes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 1:53 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/14/2017 1:54 AM 94. Explain how the Luhn Algorithm can be used to test for legitimate card numbers.

ANSWER: All legitimate credit card numbers must satisfy the Luhn Algorithm also known as

the Mod10 Algorithm, which is an algorithm developed in the 1960’s to provide a quick validation check on an account number by ensuring that the sum of the digits in the number meet certain mathematical criteria. Almost all institutions that issue unique identification numbers employ the Luhn Algorithm or some variation of it.

The steps in testing whether an ID number satisfies the Luhn Algorithm are Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 13: Programming for Web Forms

as follows: 1. Starting from the last digit and moving to the left, divide the alternating digits of the ID number into two groups.

2. Add the digits in the first group.

3. Double the digits in the second group and then add the sum of the doubled digits (not the sum of the numbers themselves so, if one of the digits is 10, then add 1 + 0, or if one of the digits is 18, then add 1 + 8.)

4. Calculate the total of the sums from the two groups.

5. If the total sum is evenly divisible by 10, the ID number satisfies the Luhn Algorithm and is considered legitimate, otherwise the ID number is illegitimate.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1041 QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: 13.10 - Validate credit card numbers NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Testing for Legitimate Card Numbers KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 6/14/2017 2:02 AM DATE MODIFIED: 6/15/2017 9:39 AM

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming True / False 1. The nested function is hidden from other code in the script, making the code contained and easier to manage. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1064 2. JavaScript is an object-based programming language that involves working with the properties and methods

associated with objects. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1070 3. To create a custom object as an object literal, you apply the create() method. a. True b. False ANSWER: False DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1071 4. One object can be nested within another. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1071 5. The biggest advantage of an object created either as an object literal or with the new Object() command is

that the object is reusable. a. True b. False ANSWER: False DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1082 6. To create object classes, you should apply a function known as an object constructor that defines the

properties and methods associated with the object type. a. True b. False ANSWER:

True

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1082 7. One object class can include objects defined in other classes. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1085 8. A base object is the only object that has a prototype. a. True b. False ANSWER: False DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1095 9. When an object is instantiated from a constructor function, it copies the properties and methods from the

prototype into the new object. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1095 10. Instantiating an object from a constructor function results in efficient use of memory and resources. a. True b. False ANSWER: False DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1095 11. Using prototypes, any object class inherits the properties and methods from another class. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1108 12. A prototype chain ranges from the base object class in the chain, known as the superclass down to

the lower classes or subclasses. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1108 13. A prototype chain is created by defining an object prototype as a constructor function. a. True b. False ANSWER: False DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1108 14. A prototype chain should be defined in a top-down order. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1109 15. All prototype chains ultimately find their source in the custom object. a. True b. False ANSWER: False DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1109 16. You can determine whether an object has the property, prop, using the hasOwnProperty(prop)

method. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 17. The constructor for Object supports methods that are used to retrieve and define properties for any object. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 18. The showName()method provides another way to create objects that are based on existing prototypes. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming ANSWER: False DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 19. Methods are shared between objects by applying or calling a method from one object for use in another

object. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 20. for…in loops do not follow a specific order because properties can be listed and read out in any order. a. True b. False ANSWER: True DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1119 Multiple Choice 21. Identify the structure in which any function, including named functions, is nested within another function. a. function outsideFn() {

commands function insideFn() { commands } commands } b. outsideFn()function { commands function insideFn() { commands } commands } c. insideFn() function outsideFn() { function insideFn() { commands } commands } d. function outsideFn() { commands Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming

insideFn function () { commands } commands } ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1064 22. Identify the HTML element that enables the disabled objects to appear semi-transparent on the web page. a. opacity b. border c. float d. background ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1067 23. Identify the method that ensures that the functions defined in one script do not conflict with functions or

variables defined in other scripts. a. Creating object literals b. Using object constructors c. Instantiating objects d. Nesting the functions ANSWER: d DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1067 24. Which of the following objects is also known as user-defined objects? a. Native objects b. Custom objects c. Host objects d. Base objects ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1070 25. Identify the name:value pair that includes a function name and its commands, which is used to add

methods to a custom object. a. var objName = { method: function() { commands } Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming

} b. var objName = { command.function() { method() } } c. var obj= { function() { commands } } d. var objName = { function:method() { commands } } ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1070 26. Which of the following methods is applied to define a custom object? a. sort()method b. Shuffle()method c. create() method d. Console.log()method ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1071 27. Identify the general syntax of the object literal. a. var objName = {

value1: name1, value2: name2, … }; b. var objName = { name1: value1, name2: objName, … }; c. var objName = { name1: objnName, name2: value2, …

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming

}; d. var objName = { name1: value1, name2: value2, … }; ANSWER: d DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1071 28. In an object literal, each _____ pair contains a property and property value associated with the object. a. name:value b. object:name c. object:value d. name:size ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1071 29. Which of the following notations is used to write object properties? a. object(property) b. object{“property”} c. object[“property”] d. Object:“property” ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1072 30. Identify the correct syntax to add methods to a custom object. a. var objName = {

function: method () { commands } } b. var objName = { method: function() { commands } } c. Commands = { method: function() { var objName } } Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming d. var objName = {

function() { method() } } ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1075 31. Which of the following commands is used to create a custom object using the new operator? a. var objName = new Object();

object.property = value; object.method = function() { commands }; b. var objName = value; object.Name = value; object.property = function() { commands }; c. var method = new Object(); object.property = value; object.objName = function() { commands }; d. var objName = Object(); object.Name = Object(); object.method = function() { commands }; ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1082 32. Identify the significance of this keyword in the following constructor function.

function objClass(parameters) { this.prop1 = value1; this.prop2 = value2; … this.method1 = function1; this.method2 = function2; … } a. It refers to the parameters used by the constructor function. b. It refers to the properties associated with the object class.

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming c. It refers to any method associated with the object class. d. It refers to any object instance of the object class.

ANSWER: d DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1082 33. Identify the use of var objInstance = new objClass(parameters); command. a. To create instances of an object b. To define a user-defined object c. To create a custom object d. To add methods to a custom object ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1083 34. . If the constructor function is a machine to create object instances, then the _____ is the blueprint for the

objects that are created. a. method b. operator c. prototype d. command ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1095 35. Refer to the following code snippet and identify the use of the substring()and toLowerCase()

methods. function pokerCard(cardSuit, cardRank) { … this.cardImage() = function() { var suitAbbr = this.suit.substring(0, 1).toLowerCase(); return suitAbbr + this.rankValue + “.png”; } } a. To reset the text string in lowercase b. To extract the last letter of the string in lowercase c. To extract the first letter of the string in lowercase d. To set the lowercase as default ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1096 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming 36. Identify the expression used to reference a prototype. a. objInstance.prototype b. objClass.prototype c. objName.prototype d. objMethod.prototype ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1096 37. Which of the following commands is used to add a method to a prototype. a. objName.prototype.function = method; b. objName.prototype.method = function; c. objClass.prototype.method = function; d. objInstance.prototype.function = method; ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1096 38. _____ objects are extended by adding new methods to those object’s prototypes. a. Native b. Custom c. Host d. Base ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1097 39. Which of the following methods is applied to sort any array in random order? a. sort()method b. shuffle()method c. object create() method d. console.log()method ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1097 40. Refer to the following code snippet and identify the use of the shift() method in the code provided.

pokerCard.prototype.replaceFromDeck = function(pokerDeck) { this.suit = pokerDeck.cards[0].suit; this.rank = pokerDeck.cards[0].rank; this.rankValue = pokerDeck.cards[0].rankValue; pokerDeck.cards.shift(); Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming

} a. To remove the suit, rank, and rankValue from the pokerDeck object b. To add the suit, rank, and rankValue to the pokerDeck object c. To add the first card to the cards array in the pokerDeck object d. To remove the first card from the cards array in the pokerDeck object.

ANSWER: d DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1099 41. You should start at the top and move down to the lower subclasses to define the _____. a. base object b. object literal c. prototype chain d. object constructor ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1109 42. Identify the first step that is executed when JavaScript encounters code that references an object property or

method. a. Check for the property or method with the object’s prototype b. Continue moving down the chain until the property or method is located or the end of the chain is reached c. If the prototype is an instance of another object, check for the property or method in that object d. Check for the property or method within the current object instance ANSWER: d DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1109 43. When you create a custom object using an object literal or by applying the new Object() command, you

create a subclass of the _____. a. base object b. object literal c. prototype chain d. object constructor ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1109 44. Which of the following object methods returns a text string representation of object using local standards? a. obj.LocaleString() b. object.toLocale() Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming c. object.toLocaleString() d. obj.toLocaleString() ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1109 45. The _____ object method returns a text string representation of an object. a. obj.LocaleString() b. object.toString() c. object.toLocaleString() d. obj.String() ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1109 46. Which of the following Object constructor methods defines or modifies the property, prop, for the object,

obj; where descriptor describes the property. a. obj.defineProperty(object, prop, descriptor) b. prop.defineProperty(object, descriptor)) c. Object.defineProperty(obj, prop, descriptor) d. Object.descriptor(obj, property) ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 47. Identify the Object constructor method that references the prototype of the object, obj. a. Obj.getPrototypeOf b. Object.getPrototypeOf(obj) c. (obj).getPrototypeOf d. getPrototypeOf(object) ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 48. The _____ Object constructor method freezes obj so that it cannot be modified by other code. a. Object.freeze(obj) b. Object.isFrozen(obj) c. obj.freeze(Object) d. obj.isFrozen(Object) ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming 49. Which of the following Object constructor methods returns true if obj is frozen? a. Object.freeze(obj) b. Object.isFrozen(obj) c. obj.freeze(Object) d. obj.isFrozen(Object) ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 50. Identify the function of the “Object.keys(obj)” Object constructor method. a. Defines or modifies the properties for the object, obj b. Return true if obj is frozen c. References the prototype of the object, obj d. Returns an array of the enumerable properties found in obj ANSWER: d DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 51. Identify the apply() method used to borrow a method from one object class. a. function.apply(thisObj[,argArray]) b. apply.function(thisObj[,Array]) c. function.apply(thisObj[,apply]) d. Apply.function(Obj[,argArray]) ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 52. The _____ method is similar to the apply() method except that the argument values are placed in a

comma-separated list of values instead of an array. a. shuffle() b. sort() c. call() d. create() ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1111 53. Identify the syntax of the call() method. a. function.call(arg1, arg2, arg3, ...) b. function.call(thisObj, arg1, arg2, arg3, ...)

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming c. call.function(thisObj, arg1, arg2, arg3, ...) d. function.call(Obj1, Obj2,...)

ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1111 54. Identify the advantage of using JavaScript’s built-in Array object methods to loop through the contents of

an array. a. It speeds up the efficiency of your code b. It defines the properties for any object c. It connects the object name with an object property d. It helps to nest anonymous functions within event handlers ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1113 55. You should use the _____ method to test whether each item in an array matches a specified condition. a. apply() b. every() c. call() d. shuffle() ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1114 56. JavaScript objects do not support _____ like arrays do. a. for loops b. object literals c. forEach() methods d. object constructors ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1119 57. Which of the following should be used to examine the properties and keys of an object? a. forEach() loop b. call()method c. for…in loop d. create() method ANSWER: DIFFICULTY:

c Easy

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming REFERENCES: HTML 1119 58. A _____ does not follow a specific order because properties can be listed and read out in any order. a. for…in loop b. call()method c. forEach() loop d. create() method ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1119 59. Which of the following methods is used to determine whether a property is enumerable? a. prop.propertyIsEnumerable(obj) b. obj.propertyIsEnumerable(prop) c. obj.Enumerable(prop) d. propertyIsEnumerable(prop) ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1119 60. for…in loops do not follow a specific order because they accept properties that can be listed and read out

in any order. If order is important, you can use a(n) _____. a. object literal b. Array object c. prototype chain d. Object constructor ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1119

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 13-1 Kenneth wants to create a custom object for a specific programming task. He has defined the custom object by creating it as an object literal.

61. Kenneth should store the properties of the object within a comma-separated list of _____ pairs enclosed

within a set of curly braces. a. name:value b. object:name c. object:value d. name:size Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1071 62. Kenneth can also use a(n) _____ to define the custom object. a. base object b. for…in loop c. prototype chain d. object constructor ANSWER: d DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1071

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 13-2 Michelle has defined a custom object by creating an object literal. She wants to access the properties of the custom object.

63. Which of the following can help Michelle to access the properties of the custom object? a. for…in loop b. Dot operator c. Prototype chain d. Base object ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1072 64. Michelle can also write the properties of the custom object by using the _____. a. bracket notation b. constructor functions c. prototype chain d. base object ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1072

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 13-3 Thomas wants to create a custom object using the new operator. He applies the following commands: var objName = new Object(); object.property = value; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming

object.method = function() { commands }; 65. The new Object() statement is equivalent to a(n) _____. a. empty object literal b. prototype chain c. for…in loop d. base object ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1082 66. What limitation can Thomas face while creating a custom object using the new operator? a. He cannot use nested functions. b. He cannot use prototype chains. c. He cannot reuse the object. d. He cannot use a for…in loop.

ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1082

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 13-4 Edward wants to use object-based programming to create objects that belong to a specific type or class with shared properties and methods.

67. A specific object that belongs to a specific object class, created by Edward, can be termed as a(n) _____. a. loop b. instance c. prototype d. string ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1082 68. Once the constructor function for the object class is defined, instances of the object are created with the

_____ command. a. var objInstance = new objClass(parameters); b. var objInstance = objClass(obj); c. objInstance = new objClass(var); d. var objInstance = objClass Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming ANSWER: a DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1082

Case-Based Critical Thinking Questions Case 13-5 Steve has created a custom object. He wants to use a template for all the properties and methods associated with the object’s class.

69. Which of the following terms corresponds to the template that Steve wants to use? a. Loop b. Instance c. Prototype d. String ANSWER: c DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1095 70. To add a method to a prototype, Steve should apply the _____ command. a. objName.prototype.function = method; b. objName.prototype.method = function; c. objClass.prototype.method = function; d. objInstance.prototype.method = function; ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: HTML 1095 71. Simon uses the function.apply(thisObj[,argArray] method to call a method from another

object class. In this method, argArray is a(n) _____. a. argument consisting of arrays b. array of argument values c. object calling the arguments of an array d. method of argument values ANSWER: b DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1111 Completion 72. _________, such as the Date or Array objects, are part of the JavaScript language.

Native objects ANSWER: DIFFICULTY:

Easy

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming REFERENCES: HTML 1070 73. _________ are objects provided by the browser for use in interacting with the web document and browser,

such as the window, document, or form objects.

Host objects ANSWER: DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1070 74. _________ are user-defined objects created by a user for specific programming tasks.

Custom objects ANSWER: DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1070 75. To access a custom object property, we should use the object.property notation that contains a(n)

_________ operator. dot ANSWER: DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1072 76. Object properties are written using the object[“property”] notation that is also known as the

_________ notation. bracket ANSWER: DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1072 77. A specific object that is based on an object class is known as an object _________. instance ANSWER: DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1082 78. Creating an object instance based on an object class is known as _________ an object. instantiating ANSWER: DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1082 79. The hierarchy of object classes creates a(n) _________ ranging from the base object class in the chain down

to the lower classes. prototype chain ANSWER: DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1108 80. The process by which the properties and methods of base classes are shared with the subclasses is known as

_________.

ANSWER:

prototypal inheritance

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1108 81. The _________ is the fundamental JavaScript object whose methods are available to all objects. base object ANSWER: DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1109 Matching

Match the following object properties/methods to their respective descriptions. a. object.constructor b. object.hasOwnProperty(prop) c. object.isPrototypeOf(obj) d. object.propertyIsEnumerable(prop) e. object.valueOf() DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1109 82. References the constructor function that creates object ANSWER: a 83. Returns true if object exists in object obj prototype chain ANSWER: c 84. Returns the value of object as a text string, number, Boolean value, undefined, or null ANSWER: e 85. Returns true if object has the specified property, prop ANSWER: b 86. Returns true if the prop property is enumerable ANSWER: d

Match the following object constructor methods to their respective descriptions. a. Object.isFrozen(obj) b. Object.create(proto, properties) c. Object.keys(obj) d. Object.defineProperties(obj, props) e. Object.getPrototypeOf(obj) DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: HTML 1110 87. Creates an object using the prototype, proto; where properties is an optional list of properties added to

the object ANSWER: b 88. Returns true if obj is frozen Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming ANSWER: a 89. References the prototype of the object, obj ANSWER: e 90. Defines or modifies the properties, prop, for the object, obj ANSWER: d 91. Returns an array of the enumerable properties found in obj ANSWER: c Essay 92. Write a note on nested functions.

ANSWER: Any function, including named functions, can be nested within another function as in the

following structure: function outsideFn() { commands function insideFn() { commands } commands } where outsideFn() is the outer or containing function and insideFn() is the inner or nested function. A nested function is limited in scope to the commands within the containing function in the same way that variables defined within the function are local in scope. The nested function is thus hidden from other code in the script, making the code contained and easier to manage.

DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1064 93. Explain how an object can be created with the new operator.

ANSWER: You can create a native object such as an Array object using the new operator with the

expression: var array = new Array(); or a regular expression object with the expression: var regex = new RegExp(); To create a custom object using the new operator, apply the following commands: var objName = new Object(); object.property = value; object.method = function() { commands }; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Tutorial 14: Exploring Object-Based Programming

where objName is the object name, property is a property defined for that object, and method is a method assigned to that object.

DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1082 94. Explain how you can apply a for…in loop.

ANSWER: The syntax of for..in loop is as follows:

for (prop in obj) { commands } where prop references the properties contained within the obj object.

Note that for…in loops do not follow a specific order because properties can be listed and read out in any order. For item collections in which order is important, use an Array object with array values assigned index numbers. Only properties that are countable or enumerable are accessible to for…in loops. You can determine whether a property is enumerable using the following propertyIsEnumerable() method: obj.propertyIsEnumerable(prop) where obj is the object and prop is the property.

DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: HTML 1119

Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22